WO2023017320A1 - Digital assistant interaction in a communication session - Google Patents

Digital assistant interaction in a communication session Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023017320A1
WO2023017320A1 PCT/IB2022/000474 IB2022000474W WO2023017320A1 WO 2023017320 A1 WO2023017320 A1 WO 2023017320A1 IB 2022000474 W IB2022000474 W IB 2022000474W WO 2023017320 A1 WO2023017320 A1 WO 2023017320A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
input
digital assistant
response
user
natural language
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/IB2022/000474
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Rae L. LASKO
German W. Bauer
Felicia W. EDWARDS
Niranjan Manjunath
Kurt W. Piersol
Jonathan H. Russell
Lynn I. STREJA
Keith C. STRICKLING
Garrett L. Weinberg
Original Assignee
Apple Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Apple Inc. filed Critical Apple Inc.
Priority to KR1020247005007A priority Critical patent/KR20240027140A/en
Priority to CN202280056406.4A priority patent/CN117813583A/en
Publication of WO2023017320A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023017320A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/16—Sound input; Sound output
    • G06F3/167—Audio in a user interface, e.g. using voice commands for navigating, audio feedback
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G10—MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; ACOUSTICS
    • G10L—SPEECH ANALYSIS OR SYNTHESIS; SPEECH RECOGNITION; SPEECH OR VOICE PROCESSING; SPEECH OR AUDIO CODING OR DECODING
    • G10L15/00—Speech recognition
    • G10L15/22—Procedures used during a speech recognition process, e.g. man-machine dialogue
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F40/00—Handling natural language data
    • G06F40/30—Semantic analysis
    • G06F40/35—Discourse or dialogue representation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72403—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality
    • H04M1/7243—User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for local support of applications that increase the functionality with interactive means for internal management of messages
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G10—MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS; ACOUSTICS
    • G10L—SPEECH ANALYSIS OR SYNTHESIS; SPEECH RECOGNITION; SPEECH OR VOICE PROCESSING; SPEECH OR AUDIO CODING OR DECODING
    • G10L15/00—Speech recognition
    • G10L15/22—Procedures used during a speech recognition process, e.g. man-machine dialogue
    • G10L2015/223—Execution procedure of a spoken command
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M2250/00—Details of telephonic subscriber devices
    • H04M2250/74—Details of telephonic subscriber devices with voice recognition means

Definitions

  • Intelligent automated assistants can provide a beneficial interface between human users and electronic devices. Such assistants can allow users to interact with devices or systems using natural language in spoken and/or text forms. For example, a user can provide a speech input containing a user request to a digital assistant operating on an electronic device. The digital assistant can interpret the user’s intent from the speech input and operationalize the user’s intent into tasks. The tasks can then be performed by executing one or more services of the electronic device, and a relevant output responsive to the user request can be returned to the user.
  • Example methods are disclosed herein.
  • An example method includes, at an electronic device having one or more processors and memory: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receiving, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task.
  • Example non-transitory computer-readable media are disclosed herein.
  • An example non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs.
  • the one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to: receive, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receive, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generate, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmit, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receive, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiate, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmit, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task.
  • An example electronic device comprises one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receiving, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmitting, to the one
  • Initiating the task and transmitting the output indicative of the initiated task in the above described manner provides participants in a communication session with feedback that any participant may respond to the prompt for further user input and with feedback that a task has been initiated. Accordingly, user-device interactions are made more efficient and flexible by allowing any participant, such as the one having the correct and/or optimal response to the prompt, to cause the digital assistant to correctly initiate the task.
  • Providing improved feedback to the participants enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of user inputs required for the device to perform tasks, by helping users to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • initiating the task based on information corresponding to the first user and transmitting the output provides participants in a communication session with feedback that the digital assistant initiated the task based on information corresponding to the participant who most recently invoked the digital assistant, despite that another participant responded to the digital assistant’s prompt.
  • a more consistent and efficient user-device interaction may be provided by avoiding confusion about whose information the digital assistant uses to initiate tasks and by allowing the participants to confirm that the task is initiated using the correct participant’s information (or by informing the participants that the task is initiated using the incorrect participant’s information so a participant can provide corrective input).
  • Providing improved feedback to the participants and automatically initiating the task based on the first user’s information enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.
  • Example methods are disclosed herein.
  • An example method includes, at an electronic device having one or more processors and memory: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receiving, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input
  • Example non-transitory computer-readable media are disclosed herein.
  • An example non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs.
  • the one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receive, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receive, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generate, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmit the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receive, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital
  • An example electronic device comprises one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a
  • An example electronic device comprises means for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receiving, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input, where the second response is generated
  • Receiving the second response, in the second language, generated by the second digital assistant provides participants in a communication session with feedback that any participant may successfully issue a follow up request (e.g., the second natural language input) to a digital assistant in a language in which their own digital assistant is configured to operate. Accordingly, the participants are informed of the correct language in which to interact with a digital assistant in a communication session, e.g., despite that multiple digital assistants in the communication session are each configured to operate in a different language. Additionally, the second digital assistant may generate the second response to the follow up request without requiring input to invoke the second digital assistant (e.g., after receiving the transmitted first response), thereby reducing the number of user inputs required for successful task performance.
  • a follow up request e.g., the second natural language input
  • Example methods are disclosed herein.
  • An example method includes, at an electronic device having one or more processors and memory: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generating, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input
  • Example non-transitory computer-readable media are disclosed herein.
  • An example non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs.
  • the one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receive, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receive, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generate, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmit the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receive, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating
  • An example electronic device comprises one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language;
  • An example electronic device comprises means for: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generating, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input; and transmitting the second response to the one or more external devices.
  • Transmitting the second response, in the first language, generated by the first digital assistant provides participants in a communication session with feedback that any participant may successfully issue a follow up request (e.g., the second natural language input) to a digital assistant in the language in which the most recently invoked digital assistant is configured to operate. Accordingly, the participants are informed of the correct language in which to interact with a digital assistant in a communication session, e.g., despite that multiple digital assistants in the communication session are each configured to operate in a different language. Additionally, the first digital assistant may generate the second response to the follow up request without requiring input to invoke a digital assistant (e.g., after the external device receives the transmitted first response), thereby reducing the number of user inputs required for successful task performance.
  • a follow up request e.g., the second natural language input
  • FIG.1 is a block diagram illustrating a system and environment for implementing a digital assistant, according to various examples.
  • FIG.2A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples.
  • FIG.2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling, according to various examples.
  • FIG.3 illustrates a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples.
  • FIG.4 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, according to various examples.
  • FIG.5A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device, according to various examples.
  • FIG.5B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, according to various examples.
  • FIG.6A illustrates a personal electronic device, according to various examples.
  • FIG.6B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device, according to various examples.
  • FIG.7A is a block diagram illustrating a digital assistant system or a server portion thereof, according to various examples.
  • FIG.7B illustrates the functions of the digital assistant shown in FIG.7A, according to various examples.
  • FIG.7C illustrates a portion of an ontology, according to various examples.
  • FIGS.8A-8H illustrate systems and techniques for digital assistant interactions in a communication session, according to various examples.
  • FIGS.9A-9F illustrate techniques for digital assistant interactions in a communication session when DAs of the participants in the communication session are configured to operate in different languages, according to various examples.
  • FIGS.10A-10D illustrate techniques for digital assistant interactions in a communication session when DAs of the participants in the communication session are configured to operate in different languages, according to various examples.
  • FIGS.11A-11C illustrate a process for digital assistant interactions in a communication session, according to various examples.
  • FIGS.12A-12B illustrate a process for digital assistant interactions in a communication session, according to various examples.
  • FIGS.13A-13B illustrate a process for digital assistant interactions in a communication session, according to various examples.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION [0038] In the following description of examples, reference is made to the accompanying drawings in which are shown by way of illustration specific examples that can be practiced.
  • FIG.1 illustrates a block diagram of system 100 according to various examples.
  • system 100 implements a digital assistant.
  • digital assistant refers to any information processing system that interprets natural language input in spoken and/or textual form to infer user intent, and performs actions based on the inferred user intent. For example, to act on an inferred user intent, the system performs one or more of the following: identifying a task flow with steps and parameters designed to accomplish the inferred user intent, inputting specific requirements from the inferred user intent into the task flow; executing the task flow by invoking programs, methods, services, APIs, or the like; and generating output responses to the user in an audible (e.g., speech) and/or visual form.
  • audible e.g., speech
  • a digital assistant is capable of accepting a user request at least partially in the form of a natural language command, request, statement, narrative, and/or inquiry.
  • the user request seeks either an informational answer or performance of a task by the digital assistant.
  • a satisfactory response to the user request includes a provision of the requested informational answer, a performance of the requested task, or a combination of the two.
  • a user asks the digital assistant a question, such as “Where am I right now?” Based on the user’s current location, the digital assistant answers, “You are in Central Park near the west gate.” The user also requests the performance of a task, for example, “Please invite my friends to my girlfriend’s birthday party next week.” In response, the digital assistant can acknowledge the request by saying “Yes, right away,” and then send a suitable calendar invite on behalf of the user to each of the user’s friends listed in the user’s electronic address book. During performance of a requested task, the digital assistant sometimes interacts with the user in a continuous dialogue involving multiple exchanges of information over an extended period of time. There are numerous other ways of interacting with a digital assistant to request information or performance of various tasks.
  • a digital assistant In addition to providing verbal responses and taking programmed actions, the digital assistant also provides responses in other visual or audio forms, e.g., as text, alerts, music, videos, animations, etc.
  • a digital assistant is implemented according to a client-server model.
  • the digital assistant includes client-side portion 102 (hereafter “DA client 102”) executed on user device 104 and server-side portion 106 (hereafter “DA server 106”) executed on server system 108.
  • DA client 102 communicates with DA server 106 through one or more networks 110.
  • DA client 102 provides client-side functionalities such as user-facing input and output processing and communication with DA server 106.
  • DA server 106 provides server-side functionalities for any number of DA clients 102 each residing on a respective user device 104.
  • DA server 106 includes client-facing I/O interface 112, one or more processing modules 114, data and models 116, and I/O interface to external services 118.
  • the client-facing I/O interface 112 facilitates the client-facing input and output processing for DA server 106.
  • One or more processing modules 114 utilize data and models 116 to process speech input and determine the user’s intent based on natural language input. Further, one or more processing modules 114 perform task execution based on inferred user intent.
  • DA server 106 communicates with external services 120 through network(s) 110 for task completion or information acquisition.
  • User device 104 can be any suitable electronic device.
  • user device 104 is a portable multifunctional device (e.g., device 200, described below with reference to FIG. 2A), a multifunctional device (e.g., device 400, described below with reference to FIG. 4), or a personal electronic device (e.g., device 600, described below with reference to FIGS. 6A-6B).
  • a portable multifunctional device is, for example, a mobile telephone that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Specific examples of portable multifunction devices include the Apple Watch®, iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
  • user device 104 is a non-portable multifunctional device.
  • user device 104 is a desktop computer, a game console, a speaker, a television, or a television set-top box.
  • user device 104 includes a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads).
  • user device 104 optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick.
  • electronic devices such as multifunctional devices, are described below in greater detail.
  • Examples of communication network(s) 110 include local area networks (LAN) and wide area networks (WAN), e.g., the Internet.
  • Communication network(s) 110 is implemented using any known network protocol, including various wired or wireless protocols, such as, for example, Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol.
  • Server system 108 is implemented on one or more standalone data processing apparatus or a distributed network of computers.
  • server system 108 also employs various virtual devices and/or services of third-party service providers (e.g., third- party cloud service providers) to provide the underlying computing resources and/or infrastructure resources of server system 108.
  • third-party service providers e.g., third- party cloud service providers
  • user device 104 communicates with DA server 106 via second user device 122.
  • Second user device 122 is similar or identical to user device 104.
  • second user device 122 is similar to devices 200, 400, or 600 described below with reference to FIGS. 2A, 4, and 6A-6B.
  • User device 104 is configured to communicatively couple to second user device 122 via a direct communication connection, such as Bluetooth, NFC, BTLE, or the like, or via a wired or wireless network, such as a local Wi-Fi network.
  • second user device 122 is configured to act as a proxy between user device 104 and DA server 106.
  • DA client 102 of user device 104 is configured to transmit information (e.g., a user request received at user device 104) to DA server 106 via second user device 122.
  • DA server 106 processes the information and returns relevant data (e.g., data content responsive to the user request) to user device 104 via second user device 122.
  • user device 104 is configured to communicate abbreviated requests for data to second user device 122 to reduce the amount of information transmitted from user device 104.
  • Second user device 122 is configured to determine supplemental information to add to the abbreviated request to generate a complete request to transmit to DA server 106.
  • This system architecture can advantageously allow user device 104 having limited communication capabilities and/or limited battery power (e.g., a watch or a similar compact electronic device) to access services provided by DA server 106 by using second user device 122, having greater communication capabilities and/or battery power (e.g., a mobile phone, laptop computer, tablet computer, or the like), as a proxy to DA server 106. While only two user devices 104 and 122 are shown in FIG.
  • system 100 in some examples, includes any number and type of user devices configured in this proxy configuration to communicate with DA server system 106.
  • the digital assistant shown in FIG. 1 includes both a client-side portion (e.g., DA client 102) and a server-side portion (e.g., DA server 106), in some examples, the functions of a digital assistant are implemented as a standalone application installed on a user device.
  • the divisions of functionalities between the client and server portions of the digital assistant can vary in different implementations.
  • the DA client is a thin-client that provides only user-facing input and output processing functions, and delegates all other functionalities of the digital assistant to a backend server. 2.
  • FIG.2A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 200 with touch-sensitive display system 212 in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Touch-sensitive display 212 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a “touch-sensitive display system.”
  • Device 200 includes memory 202 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 222, one or more processing units (CPUs) 220, peripherals interface 218, RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, input/output (I/O) subsystem 206, other input control devices 216, and external port 224.
  • memory 202 which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums
  • memory controller 222 includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 220, peripherals interface 218, RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, input/output (I/O) subsystem 206, other input control devices 216, and external port 224.
  • Device 200 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 264.
  • Device 200 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 200 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200).
  • Device 200 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs on device 200 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch- sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200 or touchpad 455 of device 400). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 203.
  • the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • the intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors.
  • one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact.
  • a pressure- sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch- sensitive surface.
  • the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
  • the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements).
  • the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure).
  • the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure.
  • the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch.
  • a component e.g., a touch-sensitive surface
  • another component e.g., housing
  • the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device.
  • a touch-sensitive surface e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad
  • the user is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button.
  • a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements.
  • movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users.
  • a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”)
  • the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.
  • device 200 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 200 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components.
  • the various components shown in FIG. 2A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits.
  • Memory 202 includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums.
  • the computer-readable storage mediums are, for example, tangible and non-transitory.
  • Memory 202 includes high-speed random access memory and also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices.
  • Memory controller 222 controls access to memory 202 by other components of device 200.
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 202 is used to store instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of processes described below) for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor-containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions.
  • the instructions e.g., for performing aspects of the processes described below
  • Peripherals interface 218 is used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 220 and memory 202.
  • the one or more processors 220 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 202 to perform various functions for device 200 and to process data.
  • peripherals interface 218, CPU 220, and memory controller 222 are implemented on a single chip, such as chip 204. In some other embodiments, they are implemented on separate chips.
  • RF (radio frequency) circuitry 208 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 208 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals.
  • RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.
  • RF circuitry 208 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication.
  • networks such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication.
  • WWW World Wide Web
  • LAN wireless local area network
  • the RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio.
  • the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, and/or IEEE 802.11ac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MA
  • Audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, and microphone 213 provide an audio interface between a user and device 200.
  • Audio circuitry 210 receives audio data from peripherals interface 218, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 211.
  • Speaker 211 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves.
  • Audio circuitry 210 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 213 from sound waves.
  • Audio circuitry 210 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 218 for processing. Audio data are retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 202 and/or RF circuitry 208 by peripherals interface 218.
  • audio circuitry 210 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 312, FIG.3).
  • the headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 210 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
  • I/O subsystem 206 couples input/output peripherals on device 200, such as touch screen 212 and other input control devices 216, to peripherals interface 218.
  • I/O subsystem 206 optionally includes display controller 256, optical sensor controller 258, intensity sensor controller 259, haptic feedback controller 261, and one or more input controllers 260 for other input or control devices.
  • the one or more input controllers 260 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 216.
  • the other input control devices 216 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth.
  • input controller(s) 260 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse.
  • the one or more buttons e.g., 308, FIG.3 optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 211 and/or microphone 213.
  • the one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 306, FIG. 3).
  • a quick press of the push button disengages a lock of touch screen 212 or begin a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. Patent Application 11/322,549, “Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image,” filed December 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No.7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • a longer press of the push button (e.g., 306) turns power to device 200 on or off. The user is able to customize a functionality of one or more of the buttons.
  • Touch screen 212 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.
  • Touch-sensitive display 212 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user.
  • Display controller 256 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 212.
  • Touch screen 212 displays visual output to the user.
  • the visual output includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output correspond to user- interface objects.
  • Touch screen 212 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact.
  • Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 202) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 212 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 212.
  • user-interface objects e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images
  • a point of contact between touch screen 212 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user.
  • Touch screen 212 uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies may be used in other embodiments.
  • Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 212.
  • touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 212.
  • projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.
  • a touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S.
  • touch screen 212 displays visual output from device 200, whereas touch- sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output.
  • a touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is as described in the following applications: (1) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S.
  • Touch screen 212 has, for example, a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user makes contact with touch screen 212 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth.
  • the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen.
  • the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.
  • device 200 in addition to the touch screen, device 200 includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions.
  • the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output.
  • the touchpad is a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen 212 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
  • Device 200 also includes power system 262 for powering the various components.
  • Power system 262 includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.
  • Power system 262 includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.
  • Device 200 also includes one or more optical sensors 264.
  • FIG.2A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 258 in I/O subsystem 206
  • Optical sensor 264 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 243 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 264 captures still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is used as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user’s image is obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display.
  • Device 200 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265.
  • FIG. 2A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 259 in I/O subsystem 206.
  • Contact intensity sensor 265 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface).
  • Contact intensity sensor 265 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment.
  • contact intensity information e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information
  • at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212).
  • at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.
  • Device 200 also includes one or more proximity sensors 266.
  • FIG. 2A shows proximity sensor 266 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, proximity sensor 266 is coupled to input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Proximity sensor 266 is performed as described in U.S.
  • the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 212 when the multifunction device is placed near the user’s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).
  • Device 200 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 267.
  • FIG. 2A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 261 in I/O subsystem 206.
  • Tactile output generator 267 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device).
  • Contact intensity sensor 265 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 233 and generates tactile outputs on device 200 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 200.
  • At least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 200) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 200).
  • at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200.
  • Device 200 also includes one or more accelerometers 268.
  • FIG. 2A shows accelerometer 268 coupled to peripherals interface 218.
  • accelerometer 268 is coupled to an input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206.
  • Accelerometer 268 performs, for example, as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
  • information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers.
  • Device 200 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 268, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 200.
  • the software components stored in memory 202 include operating system 226, communication module (or set of instructions) 228, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 230, graphics module (or set of instructions) 232, text input module (or set of instructions) 234, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 235, Digital Assistant Client Module 229, and applications (or sets of instructions) 236.
  • memory 202 stores data and models, such as user data and models 231.
  • memory 202 (FIG.2A) or 470 (FIG.4) stores device/global internal state 257, as shown in FIGS. 2A and 4.
  • Device/global internal state 257 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 212; sensor state, including information obtained from the device’s various sensors and input control devices 216; and location information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude.
  • Operating system 226 e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks
  • Operating system 226 includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.
  • Communication module 228 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 224 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 208 and/or external port 224.
  • External port 224 e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • FIREWIRE FireWire
  • the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.
  • Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects contact with touch screen 212 (in conjunction with display controller 256) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel).
  • Contact/motion module 230 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact).
  • Contact/motion module 230 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface.
  • Determining movement of the point of contact optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts).
  • contact/motion module 230 and display controller 256 detect contact on a touchpad.
  • contact/motion module 230 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon).
  • the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 200). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter).
  • Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon).
  • detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon).
  • detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event.
  • Graphics module 232 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 212 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed.
  • the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including ,without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.
  • graphics module 232 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 232 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 256.
  • Haptic feedback module 233 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 267 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 200 in response to user interactions with device 200
  • Text input module 234 which is, in some examples, a component of graphics module 232, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 237, email 240, IM 241, browser 247, and any other application that needs text input).
  • GPS module 235 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 238 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 243 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location- based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
  • Digital assistant client module 229 includes various client-side digital assistant instructions to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant.
  • digital assistant client module 229 is capable of accepting voice input (e.g., speech input), text input, touch input, and/or gestural input through various user interfaces (e.g., microphone 213, accelerometer(s) 268, touch-sensitive display system 212, optical sensor(s) 264, other input control devices 216, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200.
  • Digital assistant client module 229 is also capable of providing output in audio (e.g., speech output), visual, and/or tactile forms through various output interfaces (e.g., speaker 211, touch-sensitive display system 212, tactile output generator(s) 267, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200.
  • output is provided as voice, sound, alerts, text messages, menus, graphics, videos, animations, vibrations, and/or combinations of two or more of the above.
  • digital assistant client module 229 communicates with DA server 106 using RF circuitry 208.
  • User data and models 231 include various data associated with the user (e.g., user-specific vocabulary data, user preference data, user-specified name pronunciations, data from the user’s electronic address book, to-do lists, shopping lists, etc.) to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant.
  • user data and models 231 include various models (e.g., speech recognition models, statistical language models, natural language processing models, ontology, task flow models, service models, etc.) for processing user input and determining user intent.
  • digital assistant client module 229 utilizes the various sensors, subsystems, and peripheral devices of portable multifunction device 200 to gather additional information from the surrounding environment of the portable multifunction device 200 to establish a context associated with a user the current user interaction and/or the current user input.
  • digital assistant client module 229 provides the contextual information or a subset thereof with the user input to DA server 106 to help infer the user’s intent.
  • the digital assistant also uses the contextual information to determine how to prepare and deliver outputs to the user.
  • Contextual information is referred to as context data.
  • the contextual information that accompanies the user input includes sensor information, e.g., lighting, ambient noise, ambient temperature, images or videos of the surrounding environment, etc.
  • the contextual information can also include the physical state of the device, e.g., device orientation, device location, device temperature, power level, speed, acceleration, motion patterns, cellular signals strength, etc.
  • information related to the software state of DA server 106 e.g., running processes, installed programs, past and present network activities, background services, error logs, resources usage, etc., and of portable multifunction device 200 is provided to DA server 106 as contextual information associated with a user input.
  • the digital assistant client module 229 selectively provides information (e.g., user data 231) stored on the portable multifunction device 200 in response to requests from DA server 106. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 also elicits additional input from the user via a natural language dialogue or other user interfaces upon request by DA server 106. Digital assistant client module 229 passes the additional input to DA server 106 to help DA server 106 in intent deduction and/or fulfillment of the user’s intent expressed in the user request. [0092] A more detailed description of a digital assistant is described below with reference to FIGS. 7A-7C. It should be recognized that digital assistant client module 229 can include any number of the sub-modules of digital assistant module 726 described below.
  • Applications 236 include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof: ⁇ Contacts module 237 (sometimes called an address book or contact list); ⁇ Telephone module 238; ⁇ Video conference module 239; ⁇ E-mail client module 240; ⁇ Instant messaging (IM) module 241; ⁇ Workout support module 242; ⁇ Camera module 243 for still and/or video images; ⁇ Image management module 244; ⁇ Video player module; ⁇ Music player module; ⁇ Browser module 247; ⁇ Calendar module 248; ⁇ Widget modules 249, which includes, in some examples, one or more of: weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249- 4, dictionary widget 249-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user- created widgets 249-6; ⁇ Widget creator module 250 for making user-created widgets 249-6; ⁇ Search module 251; ⁇ Video and music player module 252, which merges video player module and music player
  • Examples of other applications 236 that are stored in memory 202 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
  • contacts module 237 are used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 292 of contacts module 237 in memory 202 or memory 470), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e- mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 238, video conference module 239, e-mail 240, or IM 241; and so forth.
  • telephone module 238 In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, telephone module 238 are used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 237, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed.
  • the wireless communication uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.
  • video conference module 239 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.
  • e-mail client module 240 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions.
  • the instant messaging module 241 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages.
  • SMS Short Message Service
  • MMS Multimedia Message Service
  • XMPP extensible Markup Language
  • SIMPLE Session Initiation Protocol
  • IMPS Internet Messaging Protocol
  • transmitted and/or received instant messages include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS).
  • EMS Enhanced Messaging Service
  • instant messaging refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).
  • workout support module 242 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data.
  • create workouts e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals
  • communicate with workout sensors sports devices
  • receive workout sensor data calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout
  • select and play music for a workout and display, store, and transmit workout data.
  • camera module 243 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 202, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 202.
  • image management module 244 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.
  • browser module 247 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.
  • calendar module 248 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.
  • widget modules 249 are mini-applications that can be downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249-4, and dictionary widget 249-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 249-6).
  • a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file.
  • a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).
  • XML Extensible Markup Language
  • JavaScript e.g., Yahoo! Widgets
  • the widget creator module 250 are used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).
  • search module 251 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 202 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.
  • search criteria e.g., one or more user-specified search terms
  • video and music player module 252 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 212 or on an external, connected display via external port 224).
  • device 200 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).
  • notes module 253 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.
  • map module 254 are used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.
  • online video module 255 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 224), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264.
  • instant messaging module 241 rather than e-mail client module 240, is used to send a link to a particular online video.
  • modules e.g., sets of instructions
  • video player module can be combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 252, FIG. 2A).
  • memory 202 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 202 stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
  • device 200 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad.
  • the predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces.
  • the touchpad when touched by the user, navigates device 200 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 200.
  • a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad.
  • the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.
  • FIG.2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
  • memory 202 (FIG.2A) or 470 (FIG.4) includes event sorter 270 (e.g., in operating system 226) and a respective application 236-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 237-251, 255, 480-490).
  • Event sorter 270 receives event information and determines the application 236-1 and application view 291 of application 236-1 to which to deliver the event information.
  • Event sorter 270 includes event monitor 271 and event dispatcher module 274.
  • application 236-1 includes application internal state 292, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 212 when the application is active or executing.
  • device/global internal state 257 is used by event sorter 270 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 292 is used by event sorter 270 to determine application views 291 to which to deliver event information.
  • application internal state 292 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 236-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 236-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 236-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
  • Event monitor 271 receives event information from peripherals interface 218. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch- sensitive display 212, as part of a multi-touch gesture).
  • Peripherals interface 218 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 206 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 266, accelerometer(s) 268, and/or microphone 213 (through audio circuitry 210). Information that peripherals interface 218 receives from I/O subsystem 206 includes information from touch- sensitive display 212 or a touch-sensitive surface. [0119] In some embodiments, event monitor 271 sends requests to the peripherals interface 218 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).
  • a significant event e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration.
  • event sorter 270 also includes a hit view determination module 272 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 273.
  • Hit view determination module 272 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 212 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.
  • Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur.
  • the application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application.
  • Hit view determination module 272 receives information related to sub events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 272 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub- events that form an event or potential event).
  • the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
  • Active event recognizer determination module 273 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events.
  • Event dispatcher module 274 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 280). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 273, event dispatcher module 274 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 273. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 274 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 282.
  • operating system 226 includes event sorter 270.
  • application 236-1 includes event sorter 270.
  • event sorter 270 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 202, such as contact/motion module 230.
  • application 236-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 290 and one or more application views 291, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application’s user interface.
  • Each application view 291 of the application 236-1 includes one or more event recognizers 280.
  • a respective application view 291 includes a plurality of event recognizers 280.
  • one or more of event recognizers 280 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 236-1 inherits methods and other properties.
  • a respective event handler 290 includes one or more of: data updater 276, object updater 277, GUI updater 278, and/or event data 279 received from event sorter 270.
  • Event handler 290 utilizes or calls data updater 276, object updater 277, or GUI updater 278 to update the application internal state 292.
  • one or more of the application views 291 include one or more respective event handlers 290.
  • a respective event recognizer 280 receives event information (e.g., event data 279) from event sorter 270 and identifies an event from the event information.
  • Event recognizer 280 includes event receiver 282 and event comparator 284.
  • event recognizer 280 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 283, and event delivery instructions 288 (which include sub-event delivery instructions).
  • Event receiver 282 receives event information from event sorter 270.
  • the event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement.
  • the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event.
  • the event information also includes speed and direction of the sub-event.
  • events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.
  • Event comparator 284 compares the event information to predefined event or sub- event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event.
  • event comparator 284 includes event definitions 286.
  • Event definitions 286 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (287-1), event 2 (287- 2), and others.
  • sub-events in an event (287) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching.
  • the definition for event 1 (287-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase.
  • the definition for event 2 (287-2) is a dragging on a displayed object.
  • the dragging for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch- sensitive display 212, and liftoff of the touch (touch end).
  • the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 290.
  • event definition 287 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object.
  • event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event.
  • event comparator 284 when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 212, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 290, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 290 should be activated. For example, event comparator 284 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.
  • the definition for a respective event (287) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type.
  • a respective event recognizer 280 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 286, the respective event recognizer 280 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.
  • a respective event recognizer 280 includes metadata 283 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers.
  • metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another.
  • metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.
  • a respective event recognizer 280 activates event handler 290 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized.
  • a respective event recognizer 280 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 290. Activating an event handler 290 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view.
  • event recognizer 280 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 290 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.
  • event delivery instructions 288 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views.
  • Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.
  • data updater 276 creates and updates data used in application 236-1. For example, data updater 276 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 237, or stores a video file used in video player module.
  • object updater 277 creates and updates objects used in application 236-1. For example, object updater 277 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object.
  • GUI updater 278 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 278 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 232 for display on a touch- sensitive display.
  • event handler(s) 290 includes or has access to data updater 276 object updater 277 and GUI updater 278
  • data updater 276 object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a single module of a respective application 236-1 or application view 291. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
  • event handler(s) 290 includes or has access to data updater 276 object updater 277 and GUI updater 278
  • data updater 276 object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a single module of a respective application 236-1 or application view 291. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
  • event handler(s) 290 includes or has access to data updater 276 object updater 277 and GUI updater 278
  • data updater 276 object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a single module of a respective application 236-1 or application view 291. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
  • FIG.3 illustrates a portable multifunction device 200 having a touch screen 212 in accordance with some embodiments.
  • the touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 300.
  • UI user interface
  • a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 302 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 303 (not drawn to scale in the figure).
  • selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics.
  • the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 200.
  • inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.
  • Device 200 also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 304.
  • menu button 304 is used to navigate to any application 236 in a set of applications that is executed on device 200.
  • the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 212.
  • device 200 includes touch screen 212, menu button 304, push button 306 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 308, subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 310, headset jack 312, and docking/charging external port 224.
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • Push button 306 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process.
  • device 200 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 213.
  • Device 200 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 212 and/or one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 200.
  • FIG.4 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
  • Device 400 need not be portable.
  • device 400 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller).
  • Device 400 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 410, one or more network or other communications interfaces 460, memory 470, and one or more communication buses 420 for interconnecting these components.
  • CPUs processing units
  • Communication buses 420 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components.
  • Device 400 includes input/output (I/O) interface 430 comprising display 440, which is typically a touch screen display.
  • I/O interface 430 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 450 and touchpad 455, tactile output generator 457 for generating tactile outputs on device 400 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 267 described above with reference to FIG. 2A), sensors 459 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 265 described above with reference to FIG.2A).
  • sensors 459 e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 265 described above with reference to FIG.2A).
  • Memory 470 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non- volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 470 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 410. In some embodiments, memory 470 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs modules and data structures stored in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 470 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200.
  • memory 470 of device 400 optionally stores drawing module 480, presentation module 482, word processing module 484, website creation module 486, disk authoring module 488, and/or spreadsheet module 490, while memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A) optionally does not store these modules.
  • Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 4 is, in some examples, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices.
  • Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above.
  • the above-identified modules or programs (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments.
  • memory 470 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 470 stores additional modules and data structures not described above. [0145] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that can be implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 200. [0146] FIG.5A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 200 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are implemented on device 400.
  • user interface 500 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof: [0147] Signal strength indicator(s) 502 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals; ⁇ Time 504; ⁇ Bluetooth indicator 505; ⁇ Battery status indicator 506; ⁇ Tray 508 with icons for frequently used applications, such as: o Icon 516 for telephone module 238, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 514 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 518 for e-mail client module 240, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 510 of the number of unread e-mails; o Icon 520 for browser module 247, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 522 for video and music player module 252, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 252, labeled “iPod;” and ⁇ Icons for other applications, such as: o Icon 524 for IM module 241, label
  • icon labels illustrated in FIG.5A are merely exemplary.
  • icon 522 for video and music player module 252 is optionally labeled “Music” or “Music Player.”
  • Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons.
  • a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon.
  • a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.
  • FIG.5B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 400, FIG.
  • Device 400 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 459) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 551 and/or one or more tactile output generators 457 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 400.
  • contact intensity sensors e.g., one or more of sensors 459 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 551 and/or one or more tactile output generators 457 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 400.
  • the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 5B.
  • the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 551 in FIG.5B) has a primary axis (e.g., 552 in FIG. 5B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 553 in FIG. 5B) on the display (e.g., 550).
  • the device detects contacts (e.g., 560 and 562 in FIG.5B) with the touch- sensitive surface 551 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 5B, 560 corresponds to 568 and 562 corresponds to 570).
  • user inputs e.g., contacts 560 and 562, and movements thereof
  • the device on the touch- sensitive surface e.g., 551 in FIG.5B
  • the device on the touch-sensitive surface e.g., 551 in FIG.5B
  • the device on the touch-sensitive surface e.g., 551 in FIG.5B
  • the device on the touch-sensitive surface e.g., 551 in FIG.5B
  • the device e.g., 550 in FIG. 5B
  • similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.
  • finger inputs e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures
  • one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input).
  • a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact).
  • FIG.6A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 600.
  • Device 600 includes body 602.
  • device 600 includes some or all of the features described with respect to devices 200 and 400 (e.g., FIGS. 2A-4).
  • device 600 has touch-sensitive display screen 604, hereafter touch screen 604.
  • device 600 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface.
  • touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) has one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied.
  • the one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) provide output data that represents the intensity of touches.
  • the user interface of device 600 responds to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 600.
  • device 600 has one or more input mechanisms 606 and 608.
  • Input mechanisms 606 and 608, if included, are physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms.
  • device 600 has one or more attachment mechanisms.
  • FIG.6B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 600.
  • device 600 includes some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS.2A, 2B, and 4.
  • Device 600 has bus 612 that operatively couples I/O section 614 with one or more computer processors 616 and memory 618.
  • I/O section 614 is connected to display 604, which can have touch-sensitive component 622 and, optionally, touch-intensity sensitive component 624.
  • I/O section 614 is connected with communication unit 630 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques.
  • Device 600 includes input mechanisms 606 and/or 608.
  • Input mechanism 606 is a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example.
  • Input mechanism 608 is a button, in some examples. [0156]
  • Input mechanism 608 is a microphone, in some examples.
  • Personal electronic device 600 includes, for example, various sensors, such as GPS sensor 632, accelerometer 634, directional sensor 640 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 636, motion sensor 638, and/or a combination thereof, all of which are operatively connected to I/O section 614.
  • Memory 618 of personal electronic device 600 is a non-transitory computer- readable storage medium, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 616, for example, cause the computer processors to perform the techniques and processes described below.
  • the computer- executable instructions are also stored and/or transported within any non- transitory computer-readable storage medium for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor- containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions.
  • An instruction execution system, apparatus, or device such as a computer-based system, processor- containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions.
  • Personal electronic device 600 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 6B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations.
  • the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, for example, displayed on the display screen of devices 200, 400, 600, 800, and/or 900 (FIGS.2A, 4, 6A-6B, 8A-8H, 9A-9F, and 10A-10D).
  • an image e.g., icon
  • a button e.g., button
  • text e.g., hyperlink
  • focus selector refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting.
  • the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 455 in FIG. 4 or touch-sensitive surface 551 in FIG.5B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
  • a touch screen display e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212 in FIG. 2A or touch screen 212 in FIG.
  • a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
  • an input e.g., a press input by the contact
  • a particular user interface element e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element
  • focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface.
  • the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user’s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact).
  • the location of a focus selector e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box
  • a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).
  • the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples.
  • the characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact).
  • a predefined time period e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds
  • a characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like.
  • the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time).
  • the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user.
  • the set of one or more intensity thresholds includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold.
  • a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation
  • a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation
  • a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation.
  • a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.
  • a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
  • a touch-sensitive surface receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensity of the contact increases.
  • the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location).
  • a smoothing algorithm is applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact.
  • the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm.
  • these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
  • the intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface is characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds.
  • the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad.
  • the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad.
  • the device when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold.
  • these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.
  • An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input.
  • An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input.
  • An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface.
  • a decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface.
  • the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero.
  • one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold.
  • the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a “down stroke” of the respective press input).
  • the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input).
  • the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold).
  • the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold.
  • the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input).
  • the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).
  • the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold.
  • FIG.7A illustrates a block diagram of digital assistant system 700 in accordance with various examples.
  • digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a standalone computer system.
  • digital assistant system 700 is distributed across multiple computers.
  • some of the modules and functions of the digital assistant are divided into a server portion and a client portion, where the client portion resides on one or more user devices (e.g., devices 104, 122, 200, 400, 600, 800, or 900) and communicates with the server portion (e.g., server system 108) through one or more networks, e.g., as shown in FIG. 1.
  • digital assistant system 700 is an implementation of server system 108 (and/or DA server 106) shown in FIG. 1. It should be noted that digital assistant system 700 is only one example of a digital assistant system, and that digital assistant system 700 can have more or fewer components than shown, can combine two or more components, or can have a different configuration or arrangement of the components.
  • Digital assistant system 700 includes memory 702, one or more processors 704, input/output (I/O) interface 706, and network communications interface 708. These components can communicate with one another over one or more communication buses or signal lines 710.
  • memory 702 includes a non-transitory computer-readable medium, such as high-speed random access memory and/or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium (e.g., one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices).
  • I/O interface 706 couples input/output devices 716 of digital assistant system 700, such as displays, keyboards, touch screens, and microphones, to user interface module 722.
  • digital assistant system 700 includes any of the components and I/O communication interfaces described with respect to devices 200 400 600 800 or 900 in FIGS.2A, 4, 6A-6B, 8A-8H, 9A-9F, and 10A-10D.
  • digital assistant system 700 represents the server portion of a digital assistant implementation, and can interact with the user through a client-side portion residing on a user device (e.g., devices 104, 200, 400, 600, 800, or 900).
  • the network communications interface 708 includes wired communication port(s) 712 and/or wireless transmission and reception circuitry 714.
  • the wired communication port(s) receives and send communication signals via one or more wired interfaces, e.g., Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.
  • the wireless circuitry 714 receives and sends RF signals and/or optical signals from/to communications networks and other communications devices.
  • the wireless communications use any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, such as GSM, EDGE, CDMA, TDMA, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, VoIP, Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol.
  • Network communications interface 708 enables communication between digital assistant system 700 with networks, such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices.
  • memory 702 or the computer-readable storage media of memory 702 stores programs, modules, instructions, and data structures including all or a subset of: operating system 718, communications module 720, user interface module 722, one or more applications 724, and digital assistant module 726.
  • memory 702 stores instructions for performing the processes described below.
  • processors 704 execute these programs, modules, and instructions, and reads/writes from/to the data structures.
  • Operating system 718 e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, iOS, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks
  • Operating system 718 includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communications between various hardware, firmware, and software components.
  • Communications module 720 facilitates communications between digital assistant system 700 with other devices over network communications interface 708.
  • communications module 720 communicates with RF circuitry 208 of electronic devices such as devices 200, 400, and 600 shown in FIGS. 2A, 4, 6A-6B, respectively.
  • Communications module 720 also includes various components for handling data received by wireless circuitry 714 and/or wired communications port 712.
  • User interface module 722 receives commands and/or inputs from a user via I/O interface 706 (e.g., from a keyboard, touch screen, pointing device, controller, and/or microphone), and generate user interface objects on a display.
  • User interface module 722 also prepares and delivers outputs (e.g., speech, sound, animation, text, icons, vibrations, haptic feedback, light, etc.) to the user via the I/O interface 706 (e.g., through displays, audio channels, speakers, touch-pads, etc.).
  • Applications 724 include programs and/or modules that are configured to be executed by one or more processors 704. For example, if the digital assistant system is implemented on a standalone user device, applications 724 include user applications, such as games, a calendar application, a navigation application, or an email application. If digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a server, applications 724 include resource management applications, diagnostic applications, or scheduling applications, for example.
  • Memory 702 also stores digital assistant module 726 (or the server portion of a digital assistant).
  • digital assistant module 726 includes the following sub- modules, or a subset or superset thereof: input/output processing module 728, speech-to-text (STT) processing module 730, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738, and speech synthesis processing module 740.
  • STT speech-to-text
  • Each of these modules has access to one or more of the following systems or data and models of the digital assistant module 726, or a subset or superset thereof: ontology 760, vocabulary index 744, user data 748, task flow models 754, service models 756, and ASR systems 758.
  • the digital assistant can perform at least some of the following: converting speech input into text; identifying a user’s intent expressed in a natural language input received from the user; actively eliciting and obtaining information needed to fully infer the user’s intent (e.g., by disambiguating words, games, intentions, etc.); determining the task flow for fulfilling the inferred intent; and executing the task flow to fulfill the inferred intent.
  • I/O processing module 728 interacts with the user through I/O devices 716 in FIG 7A or with a user device (e g devices 104 200 400, or 600) through network communications interface 708 in FIG. 7A to obtain user input (e.g., a speech input) and to provide responses (e.g., as speech outputs) to the user input.
  • I/O processing module 728 optionally obtains contextual information associated with the user input from the user device, along with or shortly after the receipt of the user input.
  • the contextual information includes user-specific data, vocabulary, and/or preferences relevant to the user input.
  • the contextual information also includes software and hardware states of the user device at the time the user request is received, and/or information related to the surrounding environment of the user at the time that the user request was received.
  • I/O processing module 728 also sends follow-up questions to, and receive answers from, the user regarding the user request.
  • I/O processing module 728 forwards the speech input to STT processing module 730 (or speech recognizer) for speech-to-text conversions.
  • STT processing module 730 includes one or more ASR systems 758. The one or more ASR systems 758 can process the speech input that is received through I/O processing module 728 to produce a recognition result.
  • Each ASR system 758 includes a front-end speech pre-processor.
  • the front-end speech pre-processor extracts representative features from the speech input. For example, the front-end speech pre-processor performs a Fourier transform on the speech input to extract spectral features that characterize the speech input as a sequence of representative multi-dimensional vectors.
  • each ASR system 758 includes one or more speech recognition models (e.g., acoustic models and/or language models) and implements one or more speech recognition engines. Examples of speech recognition models include Hidden Markov Models, Gaussian-Mixture Models, Deep Neural Network Models, n-gram language models, and other statistical models.
  • speech recognition engines include the dynamic time warping based engines and weighted finite- state transducers (WFST) based engines.
  • the one or more speech recognition models and the one or more speech recognition engines are used to process the extracted representative features of the front-end speech pre-processor to produce intermediate recognitions results (e.g., phonemes, phonemic strings, and sub-words), and ultimately, text recognition results (e.g., words, word strings, or sequence of tokens).
  • the speech input is processed at least partially by a third-party service or on the user’s device (e.g., device 104, 200, 400, or 600) to produce the recognition result.
  • STT processing module 730 produces recognition results containing a text string (e g words or sequence of words or sequence of tokens), the recognition result is passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction.
  • STT processing module 730 produces multiple candidate text representations of the speech input. Each candidate text representation is a sequence of words or tokens corresponding to the speech input.
  • each candidate text representation is associated with a speech recognition confidence score. Based on the speech recognition confidence scores, STT processing module 730 ranks the candidate text representations and provides the n-best (e.g., n highest ranked) candidate text representation(s) to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction, where n is a predetermined integer greater than zero.
  • STT processing module 730 includes and/or accesses a vocabulary of recognizable words via phonetic alphabet conversion module 731. Each vocabulary word is associated with one or more candidate pronunciations of the word represented in a speech recognition phonetic alphabet.
  • the vocabulary of recognizable words includes a word that is associated with a plurality of candidate pronunciations.
  • the vocabulary includes the word “tomato” that is associated with the candidate pronunciations of /t ⁇ 'me ⁇ o ⁇ / and /t ⁇ 'm ⁇ to ⁇ /.
  • vocabulary words are associated with custom candidate pronunciations that are based on previous speech inputs from the user. Such custom candidate pronunciations are stored in STT processing module 730 and are associated with a particular user via the user’s profile on the device.
  • the candidate pronunciations for words are determined based on the spelling of the word and one or more linguistic and/or phonetic rules.
  • the candidate pronunciations are manually generated, e.g., based on known canonical pronunciations.
  • the candidate pronunciations are ranked based on the commonness of the candidate pronunciation. For example, the candidate pronunciation /t ⁇ 'me ⁇ o ⁇ / is ranked higher than /t ⁇ 'm ⁇ to ⁇ /, because the former is a more commonly used pronunciation (e.g., among all users, for users in a particular geographical region, or for any other appropriate subset of users).
  • candidate pronunciations are ranked based on whether the candidate pronunciation is a custom candidate pronunciation associated with the user. For example, custom candidate pronunciations are ranked higher than canonical candidate pronunciations. This can be useful for recognizing proper nouns having a unique pronunciation that deviates from canonical pronunciation.
  • candidate pronunciations are associated with one or more speech characteristics, such as geographic origin, nationality, or ethnicity.
  • the candidate pronunciation /t ⁇ 'me ⁇ o ⁇ / is associated with the United States
  • the candidate pronunciation /t ⁇ 'm ⁇ to ⁇ / is associated with Great Britain.
  • the rank of the candidate pronunciation is based on one or more characteristics (e.g., geographic origin, nationality, ethnicity, etc.) of the user stored in the user’s profile on the device. For example, it can be determined from the user’s profile that the user is associated with the United States.
  • the candidate pronunciation /t ⁇ 'me ⁇ o ⁇ / (associated with the United States) is ranked higher than the candidate pronunciation /t ⁇ 'm ⁇ to ⁇ / (associated with Great Britain). In some examples, one of the ranked candidate pronunciations is selected as a predicted pronunciation (e.g., the most likely pronunciation).
  • STT processing module 730 is used to determine the phonemes corresponding to the speech input (e.g., using an acoustic model), and then attempt to determine words that match the phonemes (e.g., using a language model).
  • STT processing module 730 first identifies the sequence of phonemes /t ⁇ 'me ⁇ o ⁇ / corresponding to a portion of the speech input, it can then determine, based on vocabulary index 744, that this sequence corresponds to the word “tomato.” [0185] In some examples, STT processing module 730 uses approximate matching techniques to determine words in an utterance. Thus, for example, the STT processing module 730 determines that the sequence of phonemes /t ⁇ 'me ⁇ o ⁇ / corresponds to the word “tomato,” even if that particular sequence of phonemes is not one of the candidate sequence of phonemes for that word.
  • Natural language processing module 732 (“natural language processor”) of the digital assistant takes the n-best candidate text representation(s) (“word sequence(s)” or “token sequence(s)”) generated by STT processing module 730, and attempts to associate each of the candidate text representations with one or more “actionable intents” recognized by the digital assistant.
  • An “actionable intent” (or “user intent”) represents a task that can be performed by the digital assistant, and can have an associated task flow implemented in task flow models 754.
  • the associated task flow is a series of programmed actions and steps that the digital assistant takes in order to perform the task.
  • natural language processing module 732 in addition to the sequence of words or tokens obtained from STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 also receives contextual information associated with the user request, e.g., from I/O processing module 728.
  • the natural language processing module 732 optionally uses the contextual information to clarify, supplement, and/or further define the information contained in the candidate text representations received from STT processing module 730.
  • the contextual information includes, for example, user preferences, hardware, and/or software states of the user device, sensor information collected before, during, or shortly after the user request, prior interactions (e.g., dialogue) between the digital assistant and the user, and the like.
  • contextual information is, in some examples, dynamic, and changes with time, location, content of the dialogue, and other factors.
  • the natural language processing is based on, e.g., ontology 760.
  • Ontology 760 is a hierarchical structure containing many nodes, each node representing either an “actionable intent” or a “property” relevant to one or more of the “actionable intents” or other “properties.”
  • an “actionable intent” represents a task that the digital assistant is capable of performing, i.e., it is “actionable” or can be acted on.
  • a “property” represents a parameter associated with an actionable intent or a sub-aspect of another property.
  • a linkage between an actionable intent node and a property node in ontology 760 defines how a parameter represented by the property node pertains to the task represented by the actionable intent node.
  • ontology 760 is made up of actionable intent nodes and property nodes.
  • each actionable intent node is linked to one or more property nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes.
  • each property node is linked to one or more actionable intent nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes.
  • ontology 760 includes a “restaurant reservation” node (i.e., an actionable intent node).
  • Property nodes “restaurant,” “date/time” (for the reservation), and “party size” are each directly linked to the actionable intent node (i.e., the “restaurant reservation” node).
  • property nodes “cuisine,” “price range,” “phone number,” and “location” are sub-nodes of the property node “restaurant,” and are each linked to the “restaurant reservation” node (i.e., the actionable intent node) through the intermediate property node “restaurant.”
  • ontology 760 also includes a “set reminder” node (i.e., another actionable intent node).
  • Property nodes “date/time” (for setting the reminder) and “subject” (for the reminder) are each linked to the “set reminder” node.
  • an actionable intent node is described as a “domain.”
  • each domain is associated with a respective actionable intent, and refers to the group of nodes (and the relationships there between) associated with the particular actionable intent.
  • ontology 760 shown in FIG. 7C includes an example of restaurant reservation domain 762 and an example of reminder domain 764 within ontology 760.
  • the restaurant reservation domain includes the actionable intent node “restaurant reservation,” property nodes “restaurant,” “date/time,” and “party size,” and sub- property nodes “cuisine,” “price range,” “phone number,” and “location.”
  • Reminder domain 764 includes the actionable intent node “set reminder,” and property nodes “subject” and “date/time.”
  • ontology 760 is made up of many domains. Each domain shares one or more property nodes with one or more other domains.
  • the “date/time” property node is associated with many different domains (e.g., a scheduling domain, a travel reservation domain, a movie ticket domain, etc.), in addition to restaurant reservation domain 762 and reminder domain 764. [0192] While FIG.
  • FIG. 7C illustrates two example domains within ontology 760, other domains include, for example, “find a movie,” “initiate a phone call,” “find directions,” “schedule a meeting,” “send a message,” and “provide an answer to a question,” “read a list,” “providing navigation instructions,” “provide instructions for a task” and so on.
  • a “send a message” domain is associated with a “send a message” actionable intent node, and further includes property nodes such as “recipient(s),” “message type,” and “message body.”
  • the property node “recipient” is further defined, for example, by the sub-property nodes such as “recipient name” and “message address.”
  • ontology 760 includes all the domains (and hence actionable intents) that the digital assistant is capable of understanding and acting upon.
  • ontology 760 is modified, such as by adding or removing entire domains or nodes, or by modifying relationships between the nodes within the ontology 760.
  • nodes associated with multiple related actionable intents are clustered under a “super domain” in ontology 760.
  • a “travel” super-domain includes a cluster of property nodes and actionable intent nodes related to travel.
  • the actionable intent nodes related to travel includes “airline reservation,” “hotel reservation,” “car rental,” “get directions,” “find points of interest,” and so on.
  • the actionable intent nodes under the same super domain (e.g., the “travel” super domain) have many property nodes in common.
  • each node in ontology 760 is associated with a set of words and/or phrases that are relevant to the property or actionable intent represented by the node.
  • the respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are the so-called “vocabulary” associated with the node.
  • the respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are stored in vocabulary index 744 in association with the property or actionable intent represented by the node. For example, returning to FIG.
  • the vocabulary associated with the node for the property of “restaurant” includes words such as “food,” “drinks,” “cuisine,” “hungry,” “eat,” “pizza,” “fast food,” “meal,” and so on.
  • the vocabulary associated with the node for the actionable intent of “initiate a phone call” includes words and phrases such as “call,” “phone,” “dial,” “ring,” “call this number,” “make a call to,” and so on.
  • the vocabulary index 744 optionally includes words and phrases in different languages.
  • Natural language processing module 732 receives the candidate text representations (e.g., text string(s) or token sequence(s)) from STT processing module 730, and for each candidate representation, determines what nodes are implicated by the words in the candidate text representation. In some examples, if a word or phrase in the candidate text representation is found to be associated with one or more nodes in ontology 760 (via vocabulary index 744), the word or phrase “triggers” or “activates” those nodes. Based on the quantity and/or relative importance of the activated nodes, natural language processing module 732 selects one of the actionable intents as the task that the user intended the digital assistant to perform. In some examples, the domain that has the most “triggered” nodes is selected.
  • the candidate text representations e.g., text string(s) or token sequence(s)
  • the domain having the highest confidence value (e.g., based on the relative importance of its various triggered nodes) is selected. In some examples, the domain is selected based on a combination of the number and the importance of the triggered nodes. In some examples, additional factors are considered in selecting the node as well, such as whether the digital assistant has previously correctly interpreted a similar request from a user.
  • User data 748 includes user-specific information, such as user-specific vocabulary, user preferences, user address, user’s default and secondary languages, user’s contact list, and other short-term or long-term information for each user. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 uses the user-specific information to supplement the information contained in the user input to further define the user intent.
  • natural language processing module 732 is able to access user data 748 to determine who the “friends” are and when and where the “birthday party” would be held, rather than requiring the user to provide such information explicitly in his/her request.
  • natural language processing module 732 is implemented using one or more machine learning mechanisms (e.g., neural networks).
  • the one or more machine learning mechanisms are configured to receive a candidate text representation and contextual information associated with the candidate text representation. Based on the candidate text representation and the associated contextual information, the one or more machine learning mechanisms are configured to determine intent confidence scores over a set of candidate actionable intents.
  • Natural language processing module 732 can select one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents based on the determined intent confidence scores.
  • an ontology e.g., ontology 760
  • ontology 760 is also used to select the one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents.
  • natural language processing module 732 identifies an actionable intent (or domain) based on the user request
  • natural language processing module 732 generates a structured query to represent the identified actionable intent.
  • the structured query includes parameters for one or more nodes within the domain for the actionable intent, and at least some of the parameters are populated with the specific information and requirements specified in the user request. For example, the user says “Make me a dinner reservation at a sushi place at 7.” In this case, natural language processing module 732 is able to correctly identify the actionable intent to be “restaurant reservation” based on the user input.
  • a structured query for a “restaurant reservation” domain includes parameters such as ⁇ Cuisine ⁇ , ⁇ Time ⁇ , ⁇ Date ⁇ , ⁇ Party Size ⁇ , and the like.
  • the user’s utterance contains insufficient information to complete the structured query associated with the domain. Therefore, other necessary parameters such as ⁇ Party Size ⁇ and ⁇ Date ⁇ are not specified in the structured query based on the information currently available.
  • natural language processing module 732 populates some parameters of the structured query with received contextual information. For example, in some examples, if the user requested a sushi restaurant “near me,” natural language processing module 732 populates a ⁇ location ⁇ parameter in the structured query with GPS coordinates from the user device. [0201] In some examples, natural language processing module 732 identifies multiple candidate actionable intents for each candidate text representation received from STT processing module 730. Further, in some examples, a respective structured query (partial or complete) is generated for each identified candidate actionable intent. Natural language processing module 732 determines an intent confidence score for each candidate actionable intent and ranks the candidate actionable intents based on the intent confidence scores.
  • natural language processing module 732 passes the generated structured query (or queries), including any completed parameters, to task flow processing module 736 (“task flow processor”).
  • the structured query (or queries) for the m-best (e.g., m highest ranked) candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736, where m is a predetermined integer greater than zero.
  • the structured query (or queries) for the m-best candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736 with the corresponding candidate text representation(s).
  • Task flow processing module 736 is configured to receive the structured query (or queries) from natural language processing module 732, complete the structured query, if necessary, and perform the actions required to “complete” the user’s ultimate request.
  • the various procedures necessary to complete these tasks are provided in task flow models 754.
  • task flow models 754 include procedures for obtaining additional information from the user and task flows for performing actions associated with the actionable intent.
  • task flow processing module 736 needs to initiate additional dialogue with the user in order to obtain additional information, and/or disambiguate potentially ambiguous utterances.
  • task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to engage in a dialogue with the user.
  • dialogue flow processing module 734 determines how (and/or when) to ask the user for the additional information and receives and processes the user responses. The questions are provided to and answers are received from the users through I/O processing module 728.
  • dialogue flow processing module 734 presents dialogue output to the user via audio and/or visual output, and receives input from the user via spoken or physical (e.g., clicking) responses.
  • task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to determine the “party size” and “date” information for the structured query associated with the domain “restaurant reservation,” dialogue flow processing module 734 generates questions such as “For how many people?” and “On which day?” to pass to the user. Once answers are received from the user, dialogue flow processing module 734 then populates the structured query with the missing information, or pass the information to task flow processing module 736 to complete the missing information from the structured query. [0205] Once task flow processing module 736 has completed the structured query for an actionable intent, task flow processing module 736 proceeds to perform the ultimate task associated with the actionable intent.
  • task flow processing module 736 executes the steps and instructions in the task flow model according to the specific parameters contained in the structured query.
  • the task flow model for the actionable intent of “restaurant reservation” includes steps and instructions for contacting a restaurant and actually requesting a reservation for a particular party size at a particular time.
  • service processing module service processing module
  • service processing module 738 acts on behalf of task flow processing module 736 to make a phone call, set a calendar entry, invoke a map search, invoke or interact with other user applications installed on the user device, and invoke or interact with third-party services (e.g., a restaurant reservation portal, a social networking website, a banking portal, etc.).
  • third-party services e.g., a restaurant reservation portal, a social networking website, a banking portal, etc.
  • the protocols and application programming interfaces (API) required by each service are specified by a respective service model among service models 756.
  • Service processing module 738 accesses the appropriate service model for a service and generates requests for the service in accordance with the protocols and APIs required by the service according to the service model.
  • service processing module 738 establishes a network connection with the online reservation service using the web address stored in the service model, and sends the necessary parameters of the reservation (e.g., time, date, party size) to the online reservation interface in a format according to the API of the online reservation service.
  • natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, and task flow processing module 736 are used collectively and iteratively to infer and define the user’s intent, obtain information to further clarify and refine the user intent, and finally generate a response (i.e., an output to the user, or the completion of a task) to fulfill the user’s intent.
  • the generated response is a dialogue response to the speech input that at least partially fulfills the user’s intent. Further, in some examples, the generated response is output as a speech output. In these examples, the generated response is sent to speech synthesis processing module 740 (e.g., speech synthesizer) where it can be processed to synthesize the dialogue response in speech form.
  • speech synthesis processing module 740 e.g., speech synthesizer
  • the generated response is data content relevant to satisfying a user request in the speech input.
  • task flow processing module 736 receives multiple structured queries from natural language processing module 732, task flow processing module 736 initially processes the first structured query of the received structured queries to attempt to complete the first structured query and/or execute one or more tasks or actions represented by the first structured query.
  • the first structured query corresponds to the highest ranked actionable intent.
  • the first structured query is selected from the received structured queries based on a combination of the corresponding speech recognition confidence scores and the corresponding intent confidence scores.
  • the task flow processing module 736 can proceed to select and process a second structured query of the received structured queries that corresponds to a lower ranked actionable intent.
  • the second structured query is selected, for example, based on the speech recognition confidence score of the corresponding candidate text representation, the intent confidence score of the corresponding candidate actionable intent, a missing necessary parameter in the first structured query, or any combination thereof.
  • Speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to synthesize speech outputs for presentation to the user. Speech synthesis processing module 740 synthesizes speech outputs based on text provided by the digital assistant.
  • the generated dialogue response is in the form of a text string.
  • Speech synthesis processing module 740 converts the text string to an audible speech output.
  • Speech synthesis processing module 740 uses any appropriate speech synthesis technique in order to generate speech outputs from text, including, but not limited, to concatenative synthesis, unit selection synthesis, diphone synthesis, domain-specific synthesis, formant synthesis, articulatory synthesis, hidden Markov model (HMM) based synthesis, and sinewave synthesis.
  • speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to synthesize individual words based on phonemic strings corresponding to the words. For example, a phonemic string is associated with a word in the generated dialogue response. The phonemic string is stored in metadata associated with the word.
  • Speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to directly process the phonemic string in the metadata to synthesize the word in speech form.
  • speech synthesis is performed on a remote device (e.g., the server system 108), and the synthesized speech is sent to the user device for output to the user. For example, this can occur in some implementations where outputs for a digital assistant are generated at a server system. And because server systems generally have more processing power or resources than a user device, it is possible to obtain higher quality speech outputs than would be practical with client-side synthesis.
  • FIGS.8A-8H illustrate systems and techniques for digital assistant (DA) interactions in a communication session, according to various examples.
  • FIG.8A illustrates a block diagram of device 800 and external device 900. As discussed below, each of devices 800 and 900 is configured to handle DA interactions in a communication session [0215]
  • Device 800 is implemented, for example, as device 200, 400, or 600.
  • external device 900 is implemented, for example, as another instance of device 200, 400, or 600. While FIGS. 8B-8H below show device 800 and external device 900 each implemented as a smartphone device, device 800 and 900 may be each implemented as another type of device, such as a smart watch, a smart speaker, a smart home appliance, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet device, a head-mounted device, and the like.
  • Device 800 implements, in memory 802 (e.g., as computer-executable instructions), first DA 804, audio control module 806, and display control module 808.
  • First DA 804 is configured to provide DA services to device 800, as discussed with respect to FIGS.7A-7C.
  • first DA 804 at least partially includes the components of DA module 726, discussed with respect to FIGS. 7A-7B above.
  • Audio control module 806 is configured to manage the audio experience of device 800 when device 800 is engaged in a communication session. For example, in conjunction with other components of device 800 configured to provide audio communications (e.g., communication module 228, RF circuitry 208, audio circuity 210, speaker 211, peripherals interface 218), audio control module 806 is configured to cause device 800 to transmit audio outputs generated by first DA 804 to other device(s) in the communication session and/or cause device 800 to output received audio generated by other DA(s) respectively operating on the other device(s).
  • audio control module 806 is configured to cause device 800 to transmit audio outputs generated by first DA 804 to other device(s) in the communication session and/or cause device 800 to output received audio generated by other DA(s) respectively operating on the other device(s).
  • Display control module 808 is configured to manage the displayed experience of device 800 when device 800 is engaged in a communication session. For example, in conjunction with other components of device 800 (e.g., communication module 228, RF circuitry 208, display controller 256, touch sensitive display system 212, peripherals interface 218), display control module 808 is configured to cause device 800 to display DA information (e.g., displayed outputs generated by first DA 804 and displayed indications of first DA 804’s state) and information about the participants in the communication session (e.g., information identifying the participants in the communication session), cause device 800 to transmit, to the other device(s), instructions to display DA information, cause device 800 to receive instructions from the other device(s) to display DA information, and/or cause device 800 to display DA information based on received instructions.
  • display DA information e.g., displayed outputs generated by first DA 804 and displayed indications of first DA 804’s state
  • information about the participants in the communication session e.g., information identifying the
  • external device 900 implements, in memory 902, second DA 904, audio control module 906, and display control module 908.
  • Second DA 904, audio control module 906, and display control module 908 are each similar or substantially identical to first DA 804, audio control module 806, and display control module 808, respectively.
  • second DA 904 at least partially includes the components of DA module 726.
  • Audio control module 906 is configured to manage the audio experience of external device 900 when external device 900 is engaged in a communication session, e.g., as described with respect to audio control module 806.
  • Display control module 908 is configured to manage the displayed experience of external device 900 when external device 900 is engaged in a communication session, e.g., as described with respect to display control module 808.
  • each participant in the communication session with a user experience consistent with a single DA being involved in the communication session.
  • first DA 804 and second DA 904 may each generate respective responses in a communication session
  • first DA 804 and second DA 904 can provide the responses using the same voice characteristics.
  • each device in the communication session may display only a single DA representation (e.g., DA indicator 812 discussed below) and the display manner of the DA representation (e.g., indicating whether a DA is speaking) may be synchronized across the devices.
  • FIG.8B illustrates device 800 engaged in a communication session with external device 900.
  • FIGS.8B-8H below show device 800 engaged in a communication session with a single external device 900, in other examples, device 800 is engaged in a communication session with multiple external devices.
  • a communication session is provided by multiple electronic devices and allows the participants in the session to share communications, e.g., textual, audio, and/or video communications.
  • the communication session corresponds to an audio communication session (e.g., a phone call), a video communication session (e.g., a video conference), a textual communication session (e.g., a group text message session), and/or a virtual or mixed reality communication session.
  • a virtual or mixed reality communication session the respective devices of the participants each provide an audiovisual experience to simulate each participant (or their respective avatar) being concurrently present in a shared location.
  • a virtual or mixed reality communication session can simulate each participant being present in a physical or virtual room of a house.
  • a communication session includes different types of communication experiences (e.g., audio, video, textual, virtual or mixed reality) provided by the respective devices of the participants.
  • a first device may provide a virtual or mixed reality communication experience (e.g., by displaying virtual representation(s) of other participant(s) in a virtual setting) while a second device may provide a video communication experience (e.g., by displaying video of the other participant(s)).
  • a communication session may be provided by multiple devices having different capabilities, e.g., by a device having virtual reality capability and a device having limited or no virtual reality capability, by a device having video capability and a device having no video capability.
  • device 800 displays representation 810 indicating that the user of external device 900 (e.g., Rae) participates in the communication session.
  • external device 900 displays representation 910 indicating that the user of device 800 (e.g., Tim) participates in the communication session. While FIG. 8B shows that representations 810 and 910 each indicate the name of a respective user, in other examples, representations 810 and 910 each include live video of the respective user and/or each include a respective physical representation (e.g., an avatar) of the respective user.
  • device 800 While device 800 is engaged in the communication session with external device 900, device 800 receives, from Tim, input to invoke first DA 804. In some examples, some types of inputs invoke a DA while other types of inputs, as discussed below, indicate whether a natural language input is intended for a DA without invoking the DA.
  • input to invoke a DA includes spoken trigger input, such as speech input including a predetermined word or phrase for invoking the DA, e.g., “Hey Siri,” “Siri,” “Assistant,” “Wake up,” and the like.
  • input to invoke a DA includes a selection of a button of the corresponding device (e.g., device 800), such as a selection of a physical button of the device or selection of an affordance displayed by the device.
  • input to invoke a DA includes detected user gaze input, e.g., input indicating that user gaze is directed to a particular displayed affordance for a predetermined duration.
  • a device determines that user gaze input is input to invoke a DA based on the timing of the natural language input relative to the user gaze input. For example, a device determines that user gaze input is to invoke a DA if user gaze is directed to the affordance at a start time of the natural language input and/or at an end time of the natural language input. In some examples, a device interprets user gaze input as input to invoke a DA when the communication session does not include any currently invoked DA.
  • the device interprets user gaze input to indicate that a natural language input is intended for a DA, but does not interpret the user gaze input as input to invoke the DA.
  • a currently invoked DA e.g., a DA has been invoked on any device in the communication session without being dismissed
  • the device interprets user gaze input to indicate that a natural language input is intended for a DA, but does not interpret the user gaze input as input to invoke the DA.
  • Tim provides the spoken trigger input “Hey Siri” to device 800.
  • device 800 transmits the spoken trigger input to external device 900 and external device 900 outputs the spoken trigger input.
  • device 800 invokes first DA 804.
  • device 800 displays DA indicator 812 to indicate the invoked DA and begins to execute certain processes and/or threads corresponding to first DA 804.
  • invoking first DA 804 in the communication session includes device 800 causing external device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) to display DA indicator 812.
  • display control module 808 device 800 causes external device 900 to display DA indicator 812 concurrently with device 800.
  • device 800 synchronizes (e.g., using display control module 808) the display state of DA indicator 812 across each device in the communication session. Thus, each device in the communication session concurrently displays DA indicator 812 in the same state.
  • device 800 displays DA indicator 812 in different states, corresponding to respective different visualizations, to indicate different states of first DA 804.
  • a first display state of DA indicator 812 indicates that first DA 804 is ready to accept (e.g., listening for) natural language input
  • a second display state indicates that first DA 804 is currently receiving natural language input
  • a third display state indicates that first DA 804 is currently processing natural language input
  • a fourth display state indicates that first DA 804 is currently responding to natural language input.
  • device 800 While device 800 is engaged in a communication session with external device 900, device 800 receives, from Tim, a natural language input corresponding to a task. For example, in FIG.
  • Tim 8B after Tim provides the spoken trigger input “Hey Siri,” Tim provides the speech input “send a message saying ‘hello’” intended to cause first DA 804 to send the message.
  • device 800 transmits the natural language input to external device 900 (and to any other external device(s) in the communication session) and the external device(s) each output the natural language input.
  • external device 900 outputs “send a message saying ‘hello,’” thereby informing Rae that Tim intends to send a message using first DA 804.
  • first DA 804 in accordance with invoking first DA 804, first DA 804 generates a prompt for further user input about the task.
  • first DA 804 processes the natural language input (e.g., as described with respect to FIGS. 7A-7C) to generate the prompt.
  • first DA 804 responsive to the natural language input “send a message saying ‘hello,’” first DA 804 generates the prompt “who would you like to send the message to?”.
  • device 800 outputs the prompt and transmits the prompt to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session), e.g., using audio control module 806.
  • external device 900 Upon receiving the transmitted prompt, external device 900 outputs “who would you like to send the message to?” to inform Rae of first DA 804’s generated prompt.
  • First DA 804 can allow any participant in the communication session to respond to the prompt. Operating first DA 804 in such manner may thus improve the flexibility and efficiency with which DAs can satisfy requested tasks. For example, by not limiting the response to the prompt to a particular participant, the participant having the correct and/or optimal response to the prompt may provide the response. Operating DAs in such manner may also provide more intuitive DA participation in communication sessions, e.g., as in a communication session between human participants, any participant may respond to a question or prompt from another participant. [0231] Turning to FIG.8C, after transmitting the prompt for further user input, device 800 receives, from external device 900, a response to the prompt.
  • the response is received at external device 900 without external device 900 receiving, after outputting the prompt, input to invoke second DA 904.
  • Rae responds to the prompt “who would you like to send the message to?” by speaking “Qingwei.”
  • External device 900 receives the response “Qingwei” and transmits the response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • device 800 outputs the received response to the prompt.
  • first DA 804 Upon receiving the response to the prompt, first DA 804 initiates the task based on the response and information stored on device 800 and corresponding to device 800’s user.
  • the stored information includes, for example, information about Tim’s contacts (e.g., identities, phone numbers, and email addresses of contacts stored on Tim’s device), calendar information, videos, photos, notes, documents, text and email messages, health information, financial information, home appliance information (e.g., on or off, locked or unlocked, temperature setting, and the like), applications installed on device 800, settings of device 800, and the like.
  • first DA 804 initiates the task by processing the response using the user’s information as described with respect to FIGS. 7A-7C. In FIG. 8C, for instance, first DA 804 initiates the task of sending a message to Qingwei saying “hello,” where Qingwei is Tim’s (not Rae’s) contact.
  • first DA 804 generates an output indicative of the initiated task and device 800 transmits the output to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • the output indicates the user whose information was used to initiate the task. For example, first DA 804 generates the output “your message to Tim’s contact Qingwei says ‘hello’, ready to send?”, where “Tim’s contact Qinqwei” indicates a use of Tim’s contact information to initiate the task.
  • external device 900 Upon receiving the output, external device 900 provides the output.
  • first DA 804 can use the information of the user who most recently invoked the DA (e.g., the current invoker Tim) to initiate the task, despite another user (e.g., Rae) responding to first DA 804’s prompt for further input. Operating first DA 804 in such manner may provide a more consistent and efficient user-DA experience by avoiding confusion about whose information first DA 804 uses to initiates tasks.
  • Operating first DA 804 in such manner may further provide improved user feedback by indicating whose information is used to initiate the task, thereby confirming that first DA 804 initiated the correct task (using the correct user’s information) or allowing users to correct the task (if initiated using the incorrect user’s information), which additionally, improves the accuracy and efficiency of user DA interaction.
  • initiating the task includes displaying, on device 800, affordance 814 corresponding to the task.
  • first DA 804 generates affordance 814 based on the information corresponding to the user of device 800. For example, in FIG.
  • initiating the task of sending a message to Qingwei saying “hello” includes displaying affordance 814 indicating that a composed message to Qingwei is ready to send.
  • device 800 synchronizes the display of affordances corresponding to initiated tasks across each device in the communication session. For example, device 800 further causes (e.g., using display control module 808) external device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) to each display affordance 814, e.g., each concurrently display affordance 814 with device 800.
  • device 800 also synchronizes any modifications to displayed affordances across each device in the communication session.
  • device 800 receives a user input corresponding to a selection of affordance 814, and in response, displays affordance 814 in a modified state.
  • FIG. 8D Tim selects affordance 814 and modifies the message to read “are you coming to the watch party?”.
  • the modified state corresponds to a modified textual content of affordance 814.
  • the modified state corresponds to a modified display manner (e.g., size, shape, color, brightness, animation) of affordance 814.
  • device 800 Responsive to modifying the state of affordance 814, device 800 (e.g., using display control module 808) causes the external device(s) to each display (e.g., concurrently with device 800) affordance 814 in the modified state.
  • external device 900 also displays modified affordance 814 indicating the updated message “are you coming to the watch party?”.
  • modifications to affordance 814 made by respective user(s) of external device(s) in the communication session are also synchronized across each device in the communication session.
  • Rae provides input corresponding to a selection of affordance 814, e.g., input to enlarge affordance 814.
  • external device 900 displays affordance 814 in a second modified state, e.g., an enlarged state.
  • external device 900 In response to receiving the input, external device 900 further transmits, to device 800, an instruction to display affordance 814 in the second modified state, e.g., using display control module 908. In response to receiving the instruction, device 800 displays affordance 814 in the second modified state. Accordingly, responsive to Rae enlarging affordance 814 at external device 900, each device in the communication session concurrently displays enlarged affordance 814. [0239] In some examples, respective DAs operating on the devices of the participants in the communication session are configured to operate in different languages.
  • the speech recognition and natural language processing capabilities of the respective DAs are configured to operate in respective different languages.
  • first DA 804 operating on device 800 in configured to operate in a first language (e.g., English) while second DA 904 operating on external device 900 is configured to operate in a different second language (e.g., Chinese).
  • first DA 804 determines whether it can interpret, in its respective language, a natural language input (e.g., a response to a prompt for further user input).
  • first DA 804 determines whether it can interpret the natural language input based on a STT confidence score corresponding to the natural language input (e.g., determined by STT processing module 730), an intent confidence score corresponding to the natural language input (e.g., determined by natural language processing module 732), and/or whether first DA 804 can successfully initiate a task based on the natural language input (e.g., using task flow processing module 736). For example, first DA 804 determines that it can interpret the natural language input if the STT confidence score is above a threshold, if the intent confidence score is above a threshold, and/or if first DA 804 can successfully initiate the task. [0241] In the example of FIG.
  • the natural language input “send a message saying ‘hello’” is in a first language (English) and first DA 804 is configured to operate in the first language. Accordingly, first DA 804 can interpret the natural language input in the first language.
  • a second language e.g., Chinese
  • second DA 904 is configured to operate in Chinese
  • Rae is accustomed to interacting with DAs in Chinese. Accordingly, Rae provides the Chinese response “ indicating a request to send the message to a contact named “ ”
  • First DA 804 determines whether it can interpret, in the first language, the response.
  • first DA 804 determines that it cannot interpret, in the first language, the response (e.g., as a STT confidence score and/or intent confidence score corresponding to the response is below a respective threshold and/or first DA 804 cannot initiate a task based on the response).
  • first DA 804 generates an output indicative of an error. For example, first DA 804 generates the output “sorry, I could’t find a contact named Song How Young” where “Song How Young” is first DA 804’s attempted English transcription of the Chinese response Device 800 further transmits, to the external device(s) in the communication session, the output indicative of the error.
  • first DA 804 may advantageously indicate (e.g., via an English response) the correct language in which to interact with first DA 804, thereby facilitating efficient and accurate task initiation.
  • a user of an external device in the communication session invokes a DA.
  • the invoked DA uses information corresponding to the user stored on the external device to initiate a requested task.
  • second DA 904 When invoked on external device 900, second DA 904 initiates tasks based on information corresponding to Rae, e.g., until second DA 904 dismisses (e.g., DA indicator 812 ceases to be displayed and/or certain processes/threads corresponding to second DA 904 cease executing on external device 900) or until another device receives user input to invoke the DA on the other device.
  • external device 900 also receives, from Rae, a second natural language input corresponding to a second task. For example, Rae speaks ” (“let’s watch Harry Potter together”) in Chinese. In FIG. 8E, external device 900 transmits the second natural language input to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • device 800 Upon receiving the second natural language input, device 800 outputs the second natural language input.
  • second DA 904 In accordance with receiving the input to invoke second DA 904, second DA 904 generates a second prompt for user input about the second task, e.g., (“which Harry Potter movie?”). External device 900 transmits the second prompt to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). Upon receiving the second prompt, device 800 outputs the second prompt.
  • Tim provides a response to the second prompt. For example, device 800 receives, from Tim, the response (“Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone”). In some examples, device 800 receives the response without Tim providing input to invoke first DA 804 after device 800 receives the second prompt.
  • Device 800 transmits the response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • second DA 904 initiates the second task based on the response and information corresponding to Rae stored on external device 900. For example, second DA 904 initiates the task of watching “Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone,” where the movie is stored on external device 900 or associated with Rae’s media subscription account. Second DA 904 further generates an output indicative of the initiated second task, e.g., (“starting watch together”).
  • External device 900 transmits the output to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • device 800 provides the output. [0246] The above described examples of FIGS.
  • 8B-8F allow a user different from the current DA invoker to respond to a DA’s prompt for user input. But sometimes, it may be desirable to enable only the current invoker to successfully respond to a DA’s prompt for further user input about a requested task. Particularly, for certain predetermined types of tasks, it may be undesirable for other user(s) to instruct the current invoker’s DA to initiate a task using the current invoker’s data. Examples of such predetermined types of tasks include secure tasks such as payment tasks (e.g., as it may be undesirable for other users to authorize payments for the current invoker) and home appliance control tasks (e.g., as it may be undesirable for other users to control the current invoker’s home appliances (e.g., unlock a door)).
  • payment tasks e.g., as it may be undesirable for other users to authorize payments for the current invoker
  • home appliance control tasks e.g., as it may be undesirable for other users to control the current invoker’s home appliances (e.g., unlock a
  • FIGS. 8G-8H illustrate techniques for handling DA requests for such predetermined types of tasks in a communication session.
  • device 800 receives a natural language input corresponding to a task.
  • the current invoker Tim provides the natural language input “pay Larry $100.”
  • Device 800 transmits the natural language input to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • External device 900 outputs the received natural language input.
  • First DA 804 further generates a prompt for further user input about the task, e.g., “ok, I’ll pay Larry $100, confirm?”.
  • first DA 804 determines whether the task corresponds to a predetermined type of task. For example, first DA 804 determines whether the natural language input corresponds to a predetermined type of domain.
  • Example predetermined types of domains include a payments domain (e.g., associated with actionable intents of making payments and/or accessing payment information) and a home control domain (e.g., associated with actionable intents of controlling the state and/or settings of a user’s home appliances).
  • first DA 804 determines that the task of paying Larry $100 corresponds to a predetermined type of task.
  • Rae provides a response to the prompt at external device 900, e.g., “Yes.”
  • Device 800 receives and outputs the prompt.
  • first DA 804 determines that the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task and in accordance with receiving the response from external device 900, first DA 804 generates an output indicating that it is unable to complete the task. For example, because first DA 804 determines that the task corresponds to the predetermined type and determines the response is received from an external device, first DA 804 generates “sorry, I can’t do that. Tim, do you confirm?”.
  • the output indicating that first DA 804 is unable to complete the task indicates the authorized user (e.g., Tim) for causing first DA 804 to complete the task.
  • Device 800 provides the output and transmits the output to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0250] Continuing with the present example, device 800 receives, from Tim, a response to the prompt for further input (e.g., “Yes”). Device 800 further transmits the response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • first DA 804 initiates the task based on information corresponding to Tim. For example, because the task is of the predetermined type and the current invoker confirms the task, first DA 804 initiates the task of paying Larry $100, where Larry is one of Tim’s contacts. First DA 804 further generates an output indicative of the initiated task, e.g., “ok I paid Larry $100.” Device 800 provides the output and transmits the output to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • the current invoker e.g., Tim
  • displayed responses (e.g., affordances) generated by DAs are not synchronized across external device(s) in the communication session if the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task. Accordingly, in some examples, causing the external device(s) to each display affordance 814 in FIGS. 8C-8D is performed in accordance with a determination that the task (e.g., sending a message) does not correspond to the predetermined type of task.
  • first DA 804 responsive to receiving the natural language input “pay Larry $100,” first DA 804 generates affordance 816 corresponding to the payment task.
  • affordance 816 is displayed on device 800 without device 800 causing (e.g., using display control module 808) the external device(s) to each display affordance 816.
  • display control module 808 does not instruct the other external device(s) to display generated affordance 816.
  • modifications Tim makes to the state of affordance 816 are also not synchronized across the external device(s) in the communication session.
  • displayed responses generated by DAs are synchronized across external device(s) in the communication session even if the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task.
  • first DA 804 determines that the task corresponds to the predetermined type, first DA 804 causes (e.g., using display control module 808) the external device(s) to each display the affordance in a non-interactive state.
  • an affordance displayed in the non-interactive state has a different display manner (e.g., is displayed in grayscale instead of color, has a smaller display size) than the affordance displayed in a normal (e.g., interactive) state.
  • the device when a device displays the affordance in the non-interactive state, the device does not allow user input to select the affordance to cause performance of a corresponding task and/or does not allow user input to modify the content of the affordance.
  • a device when a device displays the affordance in the non-interactive state, the device does not display the content (e.g., text, images) of the affordance.
  • the device displays affordance 816 in FIGS. 8G-8H in the interactive state, thereby allowing Tim to select the “confirm” button to pay Larry $100.
  • Device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) can display affordance 816 concurrently with device 800, but each display affordance 816 in the non- interactive state. For example, device 900 displays affordance 816 in grayscale and does not allow Rae to select the “confirm” button to pay Larry $100.
  • modifications made (e.g., by Tim) to the display of affordance 816 are synchronized across devices in the communication session, but affordance 816 remains displayed in the non-interactive state at the other device(s). For example, if Tim modifies the textual content of affordance 816 (e.g., to pay Larry $50 instead of $100), the other device(s) display affordance 816 to indicate the modified textual content, but still display affordance 816 in grayscale and do not allow the respective user(s) to select the “confirm” button.
  • FIGS.9A-9F and 10A-10D below illustrate techniques for DA interactions in a communication session when DAs of the participants in the communication session are configured to operate in different languages, according to various examples.
  • an invoked DA in the communication session may be configured to operate in a single language (e.g., the language of the current invoker) different from the language another participant customarily uses to interact with DAs. Thus, it may be desirable to define the correct language for interacting with DAs in a communication session.
  • device 800 While device 800 is engaged in a communication session with external device 900 (and optionally other external device(s)), device 800 receives input to invoke first DA 804.
  • Tim provides the spoken trigger input “Hey Siri.”
  • first DA 804 is configured to operate in a first language (e.g., English) and second DA 904 is configured to operate in a second language (e.g., Spanish).
  • second DA 904 is configured to operate in a second language (e.g., Spanish).
  • Tim is the current (most recent) DA invoker, meaning external device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) have not received, during the communication session, input to invoke their respective DAs.
  • Device 800 receives a first natural language input in the first language. For example, Tim says “what time is it?” to request first DA 804 to provide a current time.
  • Device 800 transmits the first natural language input to external device 900 (and to any other external device(s) in the communication session) and the external device(s) each output the first natural language input.
  • first DA 804 generates a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input.
  • Device 800 outputs the first response, transmits the first response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session), and the device(s) each output the first response. For example, in FIG.
  • first DA 804 generates the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino.”
  • a participant intends to continue interacting with a DA in the communication session, they issue a second natural language input (a follow up request) in the language in which their own DA is configured to operate.
  • a second natural language input a follow up request
  • external device 900 receives the follow up request in the second language.
  • Rae asks second DA 904, “ ⁇ y en Paris?” in Spanish.
  • Device 800 receives the follow up request from external device 900. In some examples, device 800 further outputs the follow up request.
  • the follow up request is received without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after receiving the first response. For example, Rae speaks “ ⁇ y en Paris?” without providing a spoken trigger input (e.g., “Hola Siri”) and without pressing a button of external device 900.
  • the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt (e.g., textual or audio prompt generated by first DA 804 or second DA 904) for user input (e.g., about a previously requested task).
  • the follow up request may be an unprompted request to second DA 904, unlike the prompted responses described with respect to FIGS.8B-8H.
  • the first response e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino”
  • each DA in the communication session monitors for the follow up request, e.g., for a predetermined duration after the first response is output
  • monitoring for the follow up request at a device includes determining that the follow up request is intended for the DA operating on the device. Accordingly, the DAs in the communication session may distinguish between natural language input intended as conversation between the participants (not intended for a DA) and follow up requests intended for a DA.
  • determining that a follow up request is intended for a DA includes determining that the DA receives the follow up request, from the DA’s user, within a predetermined duration (e.g., 5 seconds, 10 seconds) after the first response is output.
  • a DA determines that any natural language input received directly from the DA’s user (and not transmitted from another device), and received within the predetermined duration, is intended for itself.
  • second DA 904 determines that the follow up request “ ⁇ y en Paris?” is intended for itself because second DA 904 receives the follow up request from Rae within a predetermined duration after external device 900 outputs “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” Although device 800 also receives the follow up request, first DA 804 determines the follow up request is not intended for itself because the follow up request was received from external device 900, not from Tim. [0262] In some examples, determining that a follow up request is intended for a DA is based on a gaze direction of the DA’s user.
  • each device detects user gaze data (e.g., via device camera(s)) and analyzes the gaze data to determine whether a follow up request, received from the device’s user, is intended for the respective DA. In some examples, each device detects user gaze data within a predetermined duration after the first response is output. In some examples, a device determines that a follow up request is intended for the respective DA if user gaze is directed to a displayed gaze target (e.g., at DA indicator 812 for a predetermined period) within a predetermined duration before a start time of the follow up request, if user gaze is directed to the gaze target at the start time, and/or if user gaze is directed to the gaze target at an end time of the follow up request.
  • a displayed gaze target e.g., at DA indicator 812 for a predetermined period
  • second DA 904 determines that the follow up request “ ⁇ y en Paris?” is intended for itself based on gaze data detected by external device 900. Although device 800 also receives the follow up request “ ⁇ y en Paris?”, device 800 determines the follow up request is not intended for first DA 804 because the follow up request is received from external device 900 (not Tim) and/or because gaze data detected by device 800 does not indicate that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804. [0263] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that a follow up request is intended for a DA, the DA generates a second response, in its respective language, to the follow up request.
  • the DA generates the second response based on information corresponding to a user of the respective device (e.g., the user’s contact information, calendar information, videos, photos, notes, and the like), where the information is stored on the respective device.
  • second DA 904 generates the second response without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after external device 900 outputs the first response, e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” In FIG.
  • second DA 904 determines that the follow up request “ ⁇ y en Paris?” is intended for itself, second DA 904 generates the Spanish second response “en Paris, son las 6pm.”
  • External device 900 further transmits the second response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • device 800 upon receiving the second response, device 800 outputs the second response.
  • device 800 transmits, to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session), context information associated with the first natural language input.
  • the context information includes a transcription of the communication session determined by STT processing module 730, e.g., a transcription of the participants’ conversation and DA generated responses.
  • the context information includes the contextual information discussed with respect to FIG.7B above, e.g., information collected by sensors of device 800.
  • the context information indicates a conversational context associated with the first natural language input, e.g., a determined domain corresponding to the first natural language input.
  • first DA 804 determines that the first natural language input “what time is it?” corresponds to a time domain (e.g., associated with actionable intents of providing time data) and causes device 800 to transmit context information indicating the time domain to external device 900.
  • second DA 904 (or another DA responding to the follow up request) generates the second response to the follow up request based on the received context information.
  • second DA 904 interprets the follow up request “ ⁇ y en Paris?” to mean asking about the time in Paris to generate the second response “en Paris, son las 6pm.”
  • the response indicates the context information used. Operating DAs in such manner can avoid confusing participants in the communication session about what the response refers to.
  • the DA in accordance with a determination that a DA uses context information to interpret natural language input and a determination that the respective device is engaged in a communication session, the DA generates a response indicating the context information. For example, the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” in FIG.
  • FIG. 9A indicates the context information of Cupertino, California (e.g., Tim’s current location) used by first DA 804 to respond to “what time is it?”
  • FIG.9C illustrates an example where Tim provides a follow up request in the first language of first DA 804.
  • device 800 outputs and transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino”
  • device 800 receives, from Tim, the follow up request “what about in Paris?”.
  • the follow up request is received without device 800 receiving, after outputting and/or transmitting the first response, input to invoke first DA 804.
  • the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for further user input (e.g., about a previously requested task).
  • first DA 804 determines that the follow up request “what about in Paris?” is intended for itself, e.g., as Tim speaks the follow up request within a predetermined duration after device 800 outputs “it’s 9am in Cupertino.”
  • first DA 804 generates a second response, in the first language, to the follow up request.
  • the second response indicates an initiated task (e.g., retrieving the current time in Paris) corresponding to the follow up request.
  • first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving input to invoke first DA 804 after device 800 outputs the first response, e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino.”
  • first DA 804 generates the second response “it’s 6pm in Paris” and device 800 transmits the second response to external device 900 (and to any other external device(s) in the communication session).
  • FIG.9D illustrates an example where Tim attempts to provide a follow up request in a language different from the language of first DA 804. In FIG. 9D, continuing from FIG.
  • first DA 804 determines that the follow up request is intended for itself.
  • first DA 804 In accordance with receiving the follow up request (and optionally in accordance with a determination that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804), first DA 804 generates a second response, in the first language, to the follow up request. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving input to invoke first DA 804 after device 800 outputs the first response, e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” In the present example, the second response indicates that first DA 804 is unable to interpret the follow up request.
  • FIG.9E illustrates an example where Rae attempts to provide a follow up request in the language of the current invoker’s DA.
  • FIG. 9E continuing from FIG.9A, after device 800 transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” to external device 900, and after external device 900 outputs the first response, external device 900 receives the follow up request in the first language.
  • Rae speaks “what about in Paris?” in English.
  • External device 900 transmits the follow up request to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session) and device 800 receives the follow up request.
  • the follow up request is received at external device 900 without external device 900 receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, input to invoke second DA 904.
  • the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for further user input.
  • second DA 904 determines that the follow up request is intended for itself.
  • second DA 904 In accordance with receiving the follow up request (and optionally in accordance with a determination that the follow up request is intended for second DA 904), second DA 904 generates, in the second language, a second response to the follow up request. The second response indicates that second DA 904 is unable to interpret the follow up request. In some examples, second DA 904 generates the second response without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after external device 900 outputs the first response, e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” For example, because second DA 904 is configured to operate in Spanish, second DA 904 is unable to interpret the English follow up request “what about in Paris?”.
  • Second DA 904 thus generates the second response “no entiendo.”
  • External device 900 transmits the second response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session) and device 800 receives the response.
  • FIG.9F illustrates an example where Rae successfully interacts with second DA 904 in the second language by providing input to invoke second DA 904.
  • FIG.9F continuing from FIG.9A, after device 800 transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” to external device 900, and after external device 900 outputs the first response, external device 900 receives, from Rae, a natural language input in the second language. For example, Rae speaks “ ⁇ y en Paris?”.
  • External device 900 transmits the natural language input to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • Device 800 receives and outputs the natural language input.
  • External device 900 further receives, from Rae, input to invoke second DA 904.
  • Rae speaks “ ⁇ y en Paris?” after providing the spoken trigger input “Hola Siri” or after second DA 904 invokes responsive to a press of a button on external device 900.
  • the DA invocation transfers from device 800 in FIG. 9A to external device 900 in FIG. 9F, meaning Rae is now the current invoker.
  • second DA 904 In accordance with external device 900 receiving the input to invoke second DA 904, second DA 904 generates, in the second language, a response to the natural language input. The response indicates that second DA 904 initiates a task corresponding to the natural language input. For example, second DA 904 generates the response “en Paris, son las 6pm” to indicate initiating the task of providing the current time in Paris. External device 900 transmits the response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session) and device 800 receives the response. [0275] The examples of FIGS.9A-9F show that to successfully issue a follow up request (e.g., without providing input to invoke a DA), each participant speaks the follow up request in the language of their own DA.
  • participants may issue a follow up request in a language in which any DA in the communication session is configured to operate. For example, after the external device(s) receive and output the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” in FIG.9A, a participant may speak a follow up request in a language of any DA in the communication session.
  • the follow up request is received by the participant’s device without the device receiving, after outputting the first response, input to invoke a DA.
  • the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for further user input.
  • the DAs of the communication session coordinate amongst each other to determine the correct DA to handle the follow up request, e.g., the DA configured to operate in the language of the follow up request. For example, in response to outputting the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” at the respective devices, each DA monitors for the follow up request. Upon receiving the follow up request (e.g., from the DA’s user or from another device), each DA determines whether the follow up request is intended for itself. For example, each DA performs STT processing on the follow up request (e.g., using STT processing module 730) to determine a speech recognition confidence score.
  • STT processing e.g., using STT processing module 730
  • Each DA then causes the respective device to transmit the speech recognition confidence score to each other device.
  • Each DA compares its determined speech recognition confidence score to the speech recognition confidence scores received from other device(s). Accordingly, the DA having the highest speech recognition confidence score (e.g., the DA that determines its generated confidence score is higher than all received confidence scores) determines that the follow up request is intended for itself.
  • the DA upon determining that the follow up request is intended for a particular DA, the DA causes the respective device to transmit, to the other device(s), instructions indicating that the follow up request is not intended for the other DA(s). The instructions instruct the other DA(s) to cease any ongoing processing of the follow up request and to not generate any output responsive to the follow up request.
  • the particular DA upon determining that the follow up request is intended for a particular DA, the particular DA generates a response to the follow up request in its respective language.
  • first DA 804 determines that the follow up request is intended for itself (as the follow up request is in English and first DA 804 is configured to operate in English).
  • First DA 804 thus generates the response “it’s 6pm in Paris” and device 800 transmits the response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • FIGS.10A-10D illustrate examples where, to successfully issue a follow up request, a participant issues the follow up request in the language in which the currently invoked DA is configured to operate.
  • device 800 receives input to invoke first DA 804.
  • Tim provides the spoken trigger input “Hey Siri.”
  • Tim is the current invoker, meaning external device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) have not received, during the communication session, input to invoke their respective DAs.
  • Device 800 further receives, from Tim, a first natural language input in the first language. For example, after Tim speaks “Hey Siri,” Tim speaks “what time is it?”. Device 800 transmits the first natural language input to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • first DA 804 In accordance with invoking first DA 804, first DA 804 generates, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language speech input.
  • first DA 804 generates the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino.”
  • Device 800 outputs the first response.
  • Device 800 further transmits the first response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • FIG.10B in some examples, if a participant intends to continue interacting with a DA in the communication session, they issue a second natural language input (a follow up request) in the language of the current invoker’s DA.
  • a follow up request in the language of the current invoker’s DA.
  • external device 900 receives the follow up request in the first language.
  • Rae asks, “what about in Paris?” in English.
  • Device 800 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) receive the follow up request from external device 900. In some examples, device 800 further outputs the follow up request.
  • the follow up request is received without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after receiving the transmitted first response. For example, Rae speaks “what about in Paris?” without providing a spoken trigger input (e.g., “Hola Siri”) and without pressing a button of external device 900.
  • the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for user input (e.g., about a previously requested task).
  • first DA 804 determines whether any follow up requests received from Tim are intended for the currently invoked first DA 804.
  • second DA 904 (and any other DA(s) in the communication session) determine whether any follow up requests, received from the DA’s respective user, are intended for the currently invoked first DA 804. This is in contrast to the examples discussed with respect to FIGS.9A-9E where each DA determines whether a follow up request received from a respective user is intended for itself. Accordingly, currently invoked first DA 804 may be the only DA in the communication session enabled to respond to the follow up request.
  • determining that a follow up request is intended for first DA 804 includes determining that the follow up request is received within a predetermined duration after the respective device outputs the first response. For example, second DA 904 determines that Rae’s follow up request “what about in Paris?” is intended for first DA 804 because the follow up request is received within a predetermined duration after external device 900 outputs “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” [0287] In some examples, determining that a follow up request is intended for first DA 804 is based on a gaze direction of a user.
  • a device detects user gaze data (via device camera(s)) and analyzes the gaze data to determine whether a follow up request, received from the device’s user, is intended for first DA 804. In some examples, a device detects user gaze data within a predetermined duration after the first response is output, e.g., by device 800.
  • a device determines that a follow up request is intended for first DA 804 if user gaze is directed to a displayed gaze target (e.g., at DA indicator 812 for a predetermined period) within a predetermined duration before a start time of the follow up request, if user gaze is directed to the gaze target at the start time, and/or if user gaze is directed to the gaze target at an end time of the follow up request.
  • a displayed gaze target e.g., at DA indicator 812 for a predetermined period
  • second DA 904 determines that Rae’s follow up request “what about in Paris?” is intended for first DA 804 based on detecting Rae’s gaze at DA indicator 812.
  • the respective device in response to a DA (other than first DA 804) determining that a follow up request received from a respective user is intended for first DA 804, the respective device transmits, to device 800, an indication that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804.
  • external device 900 transmits, to device 800, an indication that the follow up request “what about in Paris?” is intended for first DA 804. If first DA 804 determines that a follow up request received from its respective user (e.g., Tim) is intended for itself, first DA 804 generates a second response to the follow request.
  • first DA 804 in accordance with receiving the follow up request from external device 900, first DA 804 generates a second response to the follow up request in the first language. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response further in accordance with device 800 receiving an indication that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving further input to invoke first DA 804 after outputting the first response and/or without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after outputting the first response.
  • first DA 804 generates the second response “it’s 6pm in Paris.”
  • device 800 transmits the second response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • first DA 804 generates the second response based on context information (e.g., conversational context information) associated with the first natural language input and the first response. For example, the first natural language input “what time is it?” and the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” are associated with context information indicating the time domain.
  • context information e.g., conversational context information
  • first DA 804 generates the second response “it’s 6pm in Paris” by interpreting “what about in Paris?” to refer to the time in Paris.
  • first DA 804 determines whether a received follow up request corresponds to a personal request.
  • a personal request generally describes a user request having a response dependent on the particular user who provided the request.
  • a personal request corresponds to a personal domain, e.g., a domain associated with an actionable intent requiring the retrieval/modification of personal data.
  • Example personal data includes a user’s contacts data, email data, message data, calendar data, reminders data, photos, videos, health information, financial information, web search history, media data (e.g., songs and audiobooks), information related to a user’s home (e.g., the states of the user’s home appliances and home security systems, home security system access information), and any other sensitive and/or private information the user may not want to expose to other users or devices.
  • Example personal requests include “call mom” (as users can have different mothers), “how many calories did I burn today?”, “how much did I spend this month?”, “show me the last picture I took,” “turn off the porch light,” “lock the front door,” and the like.
  • non-personal requests may have responses independent of the user who provided the non-personal request.
  • Example non-personal requests include “how old is Taylor Swift?”, “what’s the weather in Palo Alto?”, and “what’s the score of the Patriots game?”.
  • first DA 804 determines whether a request corresponds to a personal request by determining whether the request corresponds to a personal domain. Further techniques for determining whether a request corresponds to a personal request are described in U.S. Patent Application No.17/376,991, entitled “PERSONAL REQUEST CLASSIFIER,” filed on July 15, 2021, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • first DA 804 in accordance with a determination that a follow up request received from an external device corresponds to a personal request, first DA 804 generates a second response, in the first language, to the follow up request.
  • the second response indicates that first DA 804 is unable to satisfy a user request included in the follow up request.
  • first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving further input to invoke first DA 804 after outputting the first response and/or without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after outputting the first response. For example, suppose Rae instead provides the follow up request “read my messages” instead of “what about in Paris?” in FIG.10B.
  • First DA 804 determines that the follow up request corresponds to a personal request and thus generates the second response “sorry, I can’t do that.” First DA 804 generates the second response because first DA 804, operating on device 800, is unable to access Rae’s personal data (e.g., messages) stored on external device 900. Device 800 further transmits the second response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0293] In this manner, first DA 804 provides the participants in the communication session with feedback that first DA 804 is unable to satisfy personal requests from external devices, e.g., as first DA 804 is unable to access, for user privacy reasons, personal data stored on the external devices.
  • first DA 804 provides the participants in the communication session with feedback that first DA 804 is unable to satisfy personal requests from external devices, e.g., as first DA 804 is unable to access, for user privacy reasons, personal data stored on the external devices.
  • FIG.10C shows an example where Rae provides input to invoke second DA 904 to successfully handle a personal request.
  • Rae provides input to invoke second DA 904.
  • external device 900 receives the spoken trigger input “Hola Siri.”
  • Rae further provides, in the second language, a natural language input corresponding to a personal request.
  • external device 900 receives, from Rae “lee mis mensajes” in Spanish (“read my messages”).
  • External device 900 transmits the natural language input to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • second DA 904 generates a response to the natural language input in the second language.
  • the response indicates that second DA 904 initiates a task corresponding to the natural language input.
  • second DA 904 generates the response “Anthony dijo ‘hola’” (“Anthony says hi”) indicating that second DA 904 initiates the task of reading Rae’s messages.
  • External device 900 further transmits the response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • FIG.10D shows an example where Rae attempts to provide a follow up request in the second language of second DA 904. In FIG.10D, continuing with the example of FIG.
  • external device 900 receives the follow up request in the second language. For example, Rae speaks “ ⁇ y en Paris?” in Spanish. External device 900 transmits the follow up request to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). The follow up request is received at external device 900 without external device 900 receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, input to invoke second DA 904. In some examples, the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for further user input. [0297] In FIG. 10D, second DA 904 determines that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804.
  • first DA 804 In accordance with receiving the follow up request (and optionally in accordance with a determination that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804), first DA 804 generates, in the first language, a second response to the follow up request. The second response indicates that first DA 804 is unable to interpret the follow up request. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving further input to invoke first DA 804 after outputting the first response and/or without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after outputting the first response.
  • first DA 804 is unable to interpret the Spanish follow up request “ ⁇ y en Paris?” and thus generates the second response “sorry, I don’t understand.”
  • Device 800 further transmits the second response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session).
  • first DA 804 can indicate (e.g., via the English second response) the correct language for interacting with the first DA 804, thereby promoting accurate and efficient DA interaction.
  • Rae may provide input at external device 900 to invoke second DA 904, e.g., as discussed with respect to FIG. 10C.
  • FIGS.11A-11C illustrate process 1100 for DA interactions in a communication session, according to various examples.
  • Process 1100 is performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a DA.
  • process 1100 is performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of process 1100 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of process 1100 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of process 1100 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that process 1100 is not so limited. In other examples, process 1100 is performed using only a client device (e.g., device 800) or only multiple client devices.
  • a client device e.g., device 800
  • process 1100 some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with the process 1100.
  • an electronic device e.g., device 800
  • one or more external devices e.g., external device 900
  • input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device e.g., first DA 804
  • a first user e.g., Tim
  • the input to invoke the first digital assistant includes a spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the electronic device.
  • a natural language input corresponding to a task (e.g., “send a message saying hello” in FIG. 8B) is received from the first user.
  • a prompt for further user input about the task (e.g., “who would you like to send a message to?” in FIG. 8B) is generated by the first digital assistant.
  • the prompt for further user input about the task is transmitted (e.g., by device 800) to the one or more external devices.
  • a response to the prompt for further user input (e.g., “Qingwei” in FIG.
  • the task is initiated by the first digital assistant based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device.
  • initiating the task includes displaying, on the electronic device, an affordance (e.g., affordance 814 in FIG. 8C) corresponding to the task, where the first digital assistant generates the affordance based on the information corresponding to the first user.
  • an output indicative of the initiated task e.g., “your message to Qingwei says ‘hello’, ready to send?” in FIG.
  • the one or more external devices are caused to each display the affordance (e.g., using display control module 808).
  • causing the one or more external devices to each display the affordance is performed in accordance with a determination that the task does not correspond to a second predetermined type of task (e.g., a secure task).
  • displaying, on the electronic device, the affordance includes displaying the affordance without causing the one or more external devices to each display the affordance in accordance with a determination that the task corresponds to the second predetermined type of task.
  • a first user input corresponding to a selection of the displayed affordance is received.
  • the affordance is displayed in a modified state (e.g., affordance 814 in FIG.8D).
  • the one or more external devices are caused to each display the affordance in the modified state.
  • an instruction to display the affordance in a second modified state is received from a third external device of the one or more external devices, where the affordance is displayed in the second modified state on the third external device in response to receiving, at the third external device, a second user input corresponding to a selection of the affordance.
  • the affordance in response to receiving the instruction, is displayed on the electronic device in the second modified state (e.g., using display control module 808).
  • it is determined e.g., by first DA 804 whether the task corresponds to a predetermined type of task.
  • a third output indicating that the first digital assistant is unable to complete the task e.g., “sorry I can’t do that. Tim do you confirm?” in FIG. 8H) is generated by the first digital assistant.
  • initiating the task is performed in accordance with a determination that the task does not correspond to the predetermined type of task.
  • a third response to the prompt for further user input is received from the first user (e.g., “Yes” from Tim in FIG.8H).
  • the task is initiated by the first digital assistant based on the third response and the information corresponding to the first user.
  • a fourth output indicative of the initiated task is transmitted to the one or more external devices.
  • the natural language input is in a first language and the first digital assistant is configured to operate in the first language.
  • it is determined e.g., by first DA 804) whether the first digital assistant can interpret, in the first language, the response, where initiating the task is performed in accordance with a determination that the first digital assistant can interpret, in the first language, the response.
  • a fifth output indicative of an error is transmitted to the one or more external devices.
  • a third digital assistant e.g., second DA 904 operating on the external device is configured to operate in a second language different from the first language.
  • a second natural language input corresponding to a second task is received from a second external device of the one or more external devices, where the second external device receives the second natural language input from a second user of the second external device.
  • a second prompt for user input about the second task is received from the second external device, where the second prompt is generated by a second digital assistant (e.g., second DA 904) operating on the second external device.
  • a second response (to the second prompt for user input is received from the first user.
  • the second response is transmitted to the one or more external devices.
  • a second output is received from the second external device, where the second digital assistant initiates the second task based on the second response and information corresponding to the second user stored on the second external device and the second output is indicative of the initiated second task.
  • the second prompt is received in accordance with the second external device receiving, from the second user, second input to invoke the second digital assistant.
  • FIGS.12A-12B illustrate process 1200 for DA interactions in a communication session, according to various examples.
  • Process 1200 is performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a DA.
  • process 1200 is performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of process 1200 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of process 1200 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of process 1200 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that process 1200 is not so limited. In other examples, process 1200 is performed using only a client device (e.g., device 800) or only multiple client devices.
  • a client device e.g., device 800
  • process 1200 some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with the process 1200.
  • an electronic device e.g., device 800
  • one or more external devices e.g., external device 900
  • input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device e.g., first DA 804
  • the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language.
  • a first natural language input in the first language (e.g., “what time is it?” in FIG.9A) is received from the first user.
  • a first response e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino” in FIG.9A
  • the first response is transmitted (e.g., using audio control module 806) to the one or more external devices.
  • context information associated with the first natural language input is transmitted to an external device.
  • a second natural language input in a second language is received from an external device of the one or more external devices.
  • the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant (e.g., second DA 904) operating on the external device.
  • the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language.
  • the second natural language input does not include a response to a prompt for user input generated by the first digital assistant or the second digital assistant.
  • the input to invoke the first digital assistant includes a spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the electronic device and the second input to invoke the second digital assistant includes the spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the external device.
  • a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input is received from the external device, where the second response is generated by the second digital assistant.
  • the second digital assistant generates the second response based on the context information.
  • the external device determines that the second natural language input is intended for the second digital assistant based on a gaze direction of a third user of the external device.
  • the second digital assistant generates the second response in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input is intended for the second digital assistant. In some examples, the second digital assistant generates the second response based on information corresponding to a second user of the external device, where the information is stored on the external device. [0322] In some examples, at block 1216, after transmitting the first response, a third natural language input in the first language (e.g., “what about in Paris?” in FIG. 9E) is received from the external device. The third natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, third input to invoke the second digital assistant.
  • a third natural language input in the first language e.g., “what about in Paris?” in FIG. 9E
  • a third response, in the second language, to the third natural language input is received from the external device.
  • the third response is generated by the second digital assistant and indicates that the second digital assistant is unable to interpret the third natural language input.
  • a fourth natural language input in the second language e.g., “ ⁇ y en Paris?” in FIG. 9F
  • a fourth response, in the second language, to the fourth natural language input is received from the external device.
  • the fourth response is generated by the second digital assistant.
  • the fourth response is received in accordance with the external device receiving fourth input to invoke the second digital assistant (e.g., “Hola Siri” in FIG. 9F).
  • the fourth response indicates that the second digital assistant initiates a task corresponding to the fourth natural language input.
  • a fifth natural language input in the first language e.g., “what about in Paris?” in FIG. 9C
  • the fifth natural language input is received without the electronic device receiving, after transmitting first response, fifth input to invoke the first digital assistant.
  • a fifth response (e.g., “it’s 6pm in Paris” in FIG.9C), in the first language, to the fifth natural language input is generated by the first digital assistant.
  • the fifth response indicates an initiated task corresponding to the fifth natural language input.
  • the fifth response is transmitted to the one or more external devices (e.g., using audio control module 806).
  • a sixth natural language input in a third language different from the first language e.g., “ ⁇ y en Paris?” in FIG. 9D) is received from the first user.
  • the sixth natural language input is received without the electronic device receiving, after transmitting first response, sixth input to invoke the first digital assistant.
  • a sixth response in the first language, to the sixth natural language input (e.g., “sorry I don’t understand” in FIG.9D) is generated by the first digital assistant.
  • the sixth response indicates that the first digital assistant is unable to interpret the sixth natural language input.
  • the sixth response is transmitted to the one or more external devices (e.g., using audio control module 806).
  • FIGS.13A-13B illustrate process 1300 for DA interactions in a communication session, according to various examples.
  • Process 1300 is performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a DA.
  • process 1300 is performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of process 1300 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of process 1300 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of process 1300 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that process 1300 is not so limited. In other examples, process 1300 is performed using only a client device (e.g., device 800) or only multiple client devices.
  • a client device e.g., device 800
  • process 1300 some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with the process 1300.
  • an electronic device e.g., device 800
  • one or more external devices e.g., external device 900
  • input to invoke a first digital assistant e.g., first DA 804 operating on the electronic device is received from a first user of the electronic device.
  • the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language.
  • a first natural language input in the first language (e.g., “what time is it?” in FIG.10A) is received from the first user.
  • a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input (e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino”) is generated by the first digital assistant.
  • the first response is transmitted (e.g., using audio control module 806) to the one or more external devices.
  • a second natural language input in the first language (e.g., “what about in Paris?” in FIG.10B) is received from an external device (e.g., external device 900) of the one or more external devices.
  • the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device (e.g., second DA 904).
  • the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language.
  • the second natural language input does not include a response to a prompt for user input generated by the first digital assistant or the second digital assistant
  • the input to invoke the first digital assistant includes a spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the electronic device and the second input to invoke the second digital assistant includes the spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the external device.
  • a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input is generated by the first digital assistant.
  • the first digital assistant generates the second response based on context information associated with the first natural language input and the first response.
  • the external device determines that the second natural language input is intended for the first digital assistant based on a gaze direction of a second user of the external device.
  • the first digital assistant generates the second response in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input is intended for the first digital assistant.
  • the second response is transmitted (e.g., using audio control module 806) to the one or more external devices.
  • a third natural language input in the second language e.g., “ ⁇ y en Paris?” in FIG. 10D
  • the third natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, third input to invoke the second digital assistant.
  • a third response, in the first language, to the third natural language input is generated by the first digital assistant.
  • the third response indicates that the first digital assistant is unable to interpret the third natural language input.
  • the third response is transmitted to the one or more external devices (e.g., using audio control module 806).
  • a fourth natural language input in the second language is received from the external device.
  • a fourth response, in the second language, to the fourth natural language input is received from the external device.
  • the fourth response is generated by the second digital assistant.
  • the fourth response is received in accordance with the external device receiving fourth input to invoke the second digital assistant.
  • the fourth response indicates the second digital assistant initiates a task corresponding to the fourth natural language input.
  • it is determined (e.g., by first DA 804) whether the second natural language input corresponds to a personal request.
  • generating the second response is performed in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input does not correspond to a personal request.
  • a fifth response, in the first language, to the second natural language input is generated by the first digital assistant.
  • the fifth response indicates that the first digital assistant is unable to satisfy a user request included in the second natural language input.
  • the fifth response is transmitted to the one or more external devices (e.g., using audio control module 806).
  • a sixth natural language input in the second language e.g., “less mis mensajes” in FIG. 10C
  • the sixth natural language input corresponds to a personal request.
  • a sixth response, in the second language, to the sixth natural language input e.g., “Anthony dijo ‘hola’” in FIG. 10C
  • the sixth response is generated by the second digital assistant.
  • the sixth response is received in accordance with the external device receiving sixth input to invoke the second digital assistant.
  • the sixth response indicates that the second digital assistant initiates a task corresponding to the sixth natural language input.
  • the operations described above with reference to FIGS.13A-13B are optionally implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-6B, 7A-7C, and 8A.
  • the operations of process 1300 may be implemented by device 800 and/or 900. It would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes are implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-6B, and 7A-7C.
  • a computer-readable storage medium e.g., a non-transitory computer readable storage medium
  • the computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods or processes described herein.
  • an electronic device e.g., a portable electronic device
  • an electronic device e.g., a portable electronic device
  • an electronic device e.g., a portable electronic device
  • one aspect of the present technology is the gathering and use of data available from various sources to generate DA responses in a communication session.
  • the present disclosure contemplates that in some instances, this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person.
  • Such personal information data can include demographic data, location- based data, telephone numbers, email addresses, twitter IDs, home addresses, data or records relating to a user’s health or level of fitness (e.g., vital signs measurements, medication information, exercise information), date of birth, or any other identifying or personal information.
  • the present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefit of users.
  • the personal information data can be used to satisfy user requests to DAs
  • Further other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure.
  • health and fitness data may be used to provide insights into a user’s general wellness, or may be used as positive feedback to individuals using technology to pursue wellness goals.
  • the present disclosure contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices.
  • such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure.
  • Such policies should be easily accessible by users, and should be updated as the collection and/or use of data changes.
  • Personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection/sharing should occur after receiving the informed consent of the users.
  • policies and practices should be adapted for the particular types of personal information data being collected and/or accessed and adapted to applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For instance, in the US, collection of or access to certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state laws, such as the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); whereas health data in other countries may be subject to other regulations and policies and should be handled accordingly. Hence different privacy practices should be maintained for different personal data types in each country.
  • HIPAA Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
  • the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data.
  • the present technology can be configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services or anytime thereafter.
  • users can select not to allow DAs to access personal information data (e.g., during a communication session).
  • users can select to limit the length of time DAs can access personal information data.
  • the present disclosure contemplates providing notifications relating to the access or use of personal information. For instance, a user may be notified upon downloading an app that their personal information data will be accessed and then reminded again just before personal information data is accessed by the app. [0350] Moreover, it is the intent of the present disclosure that personal information data should be managed and handled in a way to minimize risks of unintentional or unauthorized access or use. Risk can be minimized by limiting the collection of data and deleting data once it is no longer needed. In addition, and when applicable, including in certain health related applications, data de-identification can be used to protect a user’s privacy.
  • De- identification may be facilitated, when appropriate, by removing specific identifiers (e.g., date of birth, etc.), controlling the amount or specificity of data stored (e.g., collecting location data at a city level rather than at an address level), controlling how data is stored (e.g., aggregating data across users), and/or other methods.
  • specific identifiers e.g., date of birth, etc.
  • controlling the amount or specificity of data stored e.g., collecting location data at a city level rather than at an address level
  • controlling how data is stored e.g., aggregating data across users
  • other methods e.g., aggregating data across users

Abstract

An example process includes while an electronic device is engaged in a communication session with external device(s): receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant; receiving, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmitting, to the external device(s), the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receiving, from an external device of the external device(s), a response to the prompt for further user input; initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmitting, to the external device(s), an output indicative of the initiated task.

Description

DIGITAL ASSISTANT INTERACTION IN A COMMUNICATION SESSION CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS [0001] This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No.63/233,001, entitled “DIGITAL ASSISTANT INTERACTION IN A COMMUNICATION SESSION”, filed August 13, 2021, and U.S. Non-Provisional Application No.17/866,984, entitled “DIGITAL ASSISTANT INTERACTION IN A COMMUNICATION SESSION”, filed July 18, 2022; the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein for all purposes. FIELD [0002] This relates generally to intelligent automated assistants and, more specifically, to interactions with an intelligent automated assistant in a communication session. BACKGROUND [0003] Intelligent automated assistants (or digital assistants) can provide a beneficial interface between human users and electronic devices. Such assistants can allow users to interact with devices or systems using natural language in spoken and/or text forms. For example, a user can provide a speech input containing a user request to a digital assistant operating on an electronic device. The digital assistant can interpret the user’s intent from the speech input and operationalize the user’s intent into tasks. The tasks can then be performed by executing one or more services of the electronic device, and a relevant output responsive to the user request can be returned to the user. SUMMARY [0004] Example methods are disclosed herein. An example method includes, at an electronic device having one or more processors and memory: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receiving, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task. [0005] Example non-transitory computer-readable media are disclosed herein. An example non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs. The one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to: receive, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receive, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generate, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmit, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receive, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiate, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmit, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task. [0006] Example electronic devices are disclosed herein. An example electronic device comprises one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receiving, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task [0007] An example electronic device comprises means for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receiving, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task. [0008] Initiating the task and transmitting the output indicative of the initiated task in the above described manner provides participants in a communication session with feedback that any participant may respond to the prompt for further user input and with feedback that a task has been initiated. Accordingly, user-device interactions are made more efficient and flexible by allowing any participant, such as the one having the correct and/or optimal response to the prompt, to cause the digital assistant to correctly initiate the task. Providing improved feedback to the participants enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by reducing the number of user inputs required for the device to perform tasks, by helping users to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. [0009] Further, initiating the task based on information corresponding to the first user and transmitting the output provides participants in a communication session with feedback that the digital assistant initiated the task based on information corresponding to the participant who most recently invoked the digital assistant, despite that another participant responded to the digital assistant’s prompt. Accordingly, a more consistent and efficient user-device interaction may be provided by avoiding confusion about whose information the digital assistant uses to initiate tasks and by allowing the participants to confirm that the task is initiated using the correct participant’s information (or by informing the participants that the task is initiated using the incorrect participant’s information so a participant can provide corrective input). Providing improved feedback to the participants and automatically initiating the task based on the first user’s information (e.g., without requiring further user input after the device receives the response from an external device) enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. [0010] Example methods are disclosed herein. An example method includes, at an electronic device having one or more processors and memory: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receiving, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input, where the second response is generated by the second digital assistant. [0011] Example non-transitory computer-readable media are disclosed herein. An example non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs. The one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receive, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receive, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generate, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmit the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receive, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receive, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input, where the second response is generated by the second digital assistant. [0012] Example electronic devices are disclosed herein. An example electronic device comprises one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receiving, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input, where the second response is generated by the second digital assistant. [0013] An example electronic device comprises means for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receiving, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input, where the second response is generated by the second digital assistant. [0014] Receiving the second response, in the second language, generated by the second digital assistant provides participants in a communication session with feedback that any participant may successfully issue a follow up request (e.g., the second natural language input) to a digital assistant in a language in which their own digital assistant is configured to operate. Accordingly, the participants are informed of the correct language in which to interact with a digital assistant in a communication session, e.g., despite that multiple digital assistants in the communication session are each configured to operate in a different language. Additionally, the second digital assistant may generate the second response to the follow up request without requiring input to invoke the second digital assistant (e.g., after receiving the transmitted first response), thereby reducing the number of user inputs required for successful task performance. Providing improved feedback to the participants and reducing the number of inputs needed for a digital assistant to perform tasks enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. [0015] Example methods are disclosed herein. An example method includes, at an electronic device having one or more processors and memory: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generating, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input; and transmitting the second response to the one or more external devices. [0016] Example non-transitory computer-readable media are disclosed herein. An example non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs. The one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receive, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receive, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generate, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmit the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receive, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generate, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input; and transmit the second response to the one or more external devices. [0017] Example electronic devices are disclosed herein. An example electronic device comprises one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generating, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input; and transmitting the second response to the one or more external devices. [0018] An example electronic device comprises means for: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, where the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, where: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generating, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input; and transmitting the second response to the one or more external devices. [0019] Transmitting the second response, in the first language, generated by the first digital assistant provides participants in a communication session with feedback that any participant may successfully issue a follow up request (e.g., the second natural language input) to a digital assistant in the language in which the most recently invoked digital assistant is configured to operate. Accordingly, the participants are informed of the correct language in which to interact with a digital assistant in a communication session, e.g., despite that multiple digital assistants in the communication session are each configured to operate in a different language. Additionally, the first digital assistant may generate the second response to the follow up request without requiring input to invoke a digital assistant (e.g., after the external device receives the transmitted first response), thereby reducing the number of user inputs required for successful task performance. Providing improved feedback to the participants and reducing the number of inputs needed for a digital assistant to perform tasks enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes when interacting with the device) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS [0020] FIG.1 is a block diagram illustrating a system and environment for implementing a digital assistant, according to various examples. [0021] FIG.2A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples. [0022] FIG.2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling, according to various examples. [0023] FIG.3 illustrates a portable multifunction device implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant, according to various examples. [0024] FIG.4 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, according to various examples. [0025] FIG.5A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device, according to various examples. [0026] FIG.5B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, according to various examples. [0027] FIG.6A illustrates a personal electronic device, according to various examples. [0028] FIG.6B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device, according to various examples. [0029] FIG.7A is a block diagram illustrating a digital assistant system or a server portion thereof, according to various examples. [0030] FIG.7B illustrates the functions of the digital assistant shown in FIG.7A, according to various examples. [0031] FIG.7C illustrates a portion of an ontology, according to various examples. [0032] FIGS.8A-8H illustrate systems and techniques for digital assistant interactions in a communication session, according to various examples. [0033] FIGS.9A-9F illustrate techniques for digital assistant interactions in a communication session when DAs of the participants in the communication session are configured to operate in different languages, according to various examples. [0034] FIGS.10A-10D illustrate techniques for digital assistant interactions in a communication session when DAs of the participants in the communication session are configured to operate in different languages, according to various examples. [0035] FIGS.11A-11C illustrate a process for digital assistant interactions in a communication session, according to various examples. [0036] FIGS.12A-12B illustrate a process for digital assistant interactions in a communication session, according to various examples. [0037] FIGS.13A-13B illustrate a process for digital assistant interactions in a communication session, according to various examples. DETAILED DESCRIPTION [0038] In the following description of examples, reference is made to the accompanying drawings in which are shown by way of illustration specific examples that can be practiced. It is to be understood that other examples can be used and structural changes can be made without departing from the scope of the various examples. [0039] Although the following description uses terms “first,” “second,” etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first input could be termed a second input, and, similarly, a second input could be termed a first input, without departing from the scope of the various described examples. The first input and the second input are both inputs and, in some cases, are separate and different inputs. [0040] The terminology used in the description of the various described examples herein is for the purpose of describing particular examples only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described examples and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. [0041] The term “if” may be construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” may be construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context. 1. System and Environment [0042] FIG.1 illustrates a block diagram of system 100 according to various examples. In some examples, system 100 implements a digital assistant. The terms “digital assistant,” “virtual assistant,” “intelligent automated assistant,” or “automatic digital assistant” refer to any information processing system that interprets natural language input in spoken and/or textual form to infer user intent, and performs actions based on the inferred user intent. For example, to act on an inferred user intent, the system performs one or more of the following: identifying a task flow with steps and parameters designed to accomplish the inferred user intent, inputting specific requirements from the inferred user intent into the task flow; executing the task flow by invoking programs, methods, services, APIs, or the like; and generating output responses to the user in an audible (e.g., speech) and/or visual form. [0043] Specifically, a digital assistant is capable of accepting a user request at least partially in the form of a natural language command, request, statement, narrative, and/or inquiry. Typically, the user request seeks either an informational answer or performance of a task by the digital assistant. A satisfactory response to the user request includes a provision of the requested informational answer, a performance of the requested task, or a combination of the two. For example, a user asks the digital assistant a question, such as “Where am I right now?” Based on the user’s current location, the digital assistant answers, “You are in Central Park near the west gate.” The user also requests the performance of a task, for example, “Please invite my friends to my girlfriend’s birthday party next week.” In response, the digital assistant can acknowledge the request by saying “Yes, right away,” and then send a suitable calendar invite on behalf of the user to each of the user’s friends listed in the user’s electronic address book. During performance of a requested task, the digital assistant sometimes interacts with the user in a continuous dialogue involving multiple exchanges of information over an extended period of time. There are numerous other ways of interacting with a digital assistant to request information or performance of various tasks. In addition to providing verbal responses and taking programmed actions, the digital assistant also provides responses in other visual or audio forms, e.g., as text, alerts, music, videos, animations, etc. [0044] As shown in FIG.1, in some examples, a digital assistant is implemented according to a client-server model. The digital assistant includes client-side portion 102 (hereafter “DA client 102”) executed on user device 104 and server-side portion 106 (hereafter “DA server 106”) executed on server system 108. DA client 102 communicates with DA server 106 through one or more networks 110. DA client 102 provides client-side functionalities such as user-facing input and output processing and communication with DA server 106. DA server 106 provides server-side functionalities for any number of DA clients 102 each residing on a respective user device 104. [0045] In some examples, DA server 106 includes client-facing I/O interface 112, one or more processing modules 114, data and models 116, and I/O interface to external services 118. The client-facing I/O interface 112 facilitates the client-facing input and output processing for DA server 106. One or more processing modules 114 utilize data and models 116 to process speech input and determine the user’s intent based on natural language input. Further, one or more processing modules 114 perform task execution based on inferred user intent. In some examples, DA server 106 communicates with external services 120 through network(s) 110 for task completion or information acquisition. I/O interface to external services 118 facilitates such communications. [0046] User device 104 can be any suitable electronic device. In some examples, user device 104 is a portable multifunctional device (e.g., device 200, described below with reference to FIG. 2A), a multifunctional device (e.g., device 400, described below with reference to FIG. 4), or a personal electronic device (e.g., device 600, described below with reference to FIGS. 6A-6B). A portable multifunctional device is, for example, a mobile telephone that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Specific examples of portable multifunction devices include the Apple Watch®, iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other examples of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, earphones/headphones, speakers, and laptop or tablet computers. Further, in some examples, user device 104 is a non-portable multifunctional device. In particular, user device 104 is a desktop computer, a game console, a speaker, a television, or a television set-top box. In some examples, user device 104 includes a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touchpads). Further, user device 104 optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and/or a joystick. Various examples of electronic devices, such as multifunctional devices, are described below in greater detail. [0047] Examples of communication network(s) 110 include local area networks (LAN) and wide area networks (WAN), e.g., the Internet. Communication network(s) 110 is implemented using any known network protocol, including various wired or wireless protocols, such as, for example, Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol. [0048] Server system 108 is implemented on one or more standalone data processing apparatus or a distributed network of computers. In some examples, server system 108 also employs various virtual devices and/or services of third-party service providers (e.g., third- party cloud service providers) to provide the underlying computing resources and/or infrastructure resources of server system 108. [0049] In some examples, user device 104 communicates with DA server 106 via second user device 122. Second user device 122 is similar or identical to user device 104. For example, second user device 122 is similar to devices 200, 400, or 600 described below with reference to FIGS. 2A, 4, and 6A-6B. User device 104 is configured to communicatively couple to second user device 122 via a direct communication connection, such as Bluetooth, NFC, BTLE, or the like, or via a wired or wireless network, such as a local Wi-Fi network. In some examples, second user device 122 is configured to act as a proxy between user device 104 and DA server 106. For example, DA client 102 of user device 104 is configured to transmit information (e.g., a user request received at user device 104) to DA server 106 via second user device 122. DA server 106 processes the information and returns relevant data (e.g., data content responsive to the user request) to user device 104 via second user device 122. [0050] In some examples, user device 104 is configured to communicate abbreviated requests for data to second user device 122 to reduce the amount of information transmitted from user device 104. Second user device 122 is configured to determine supplemental information to add to the abbreviated request to generate a complete request to transmit to DA server 106. This system architecture can advantageously allow user device 104 having limited communication capabilities and/or limited battery power (e.g., a watch or a similar compact electronic device) to access services provided by DA server 106 by using second user device 122, having greater communication capabilities and/or battery power (e.g., a mobile phone, laptop computer, tablet computer, or the like), as a proxy to DA server 106. While only two user devices 104 and 122 are shown in FIG. 1, it should be appreciated that system 100, in some examples, includes any number and type of user devices configured in this proxy configuration to communicate with DA server system 106. [0051] Although the digital assistant shown in FIG. 1 includes both a client-side portion (e.g., DA client 102) and a server-side portion (e.g., DA server 106), in some examples, the functions of a digital assistant are implemented as a standalone application installed on a user device. In addition, the divisions of functionalities between the client and server portions of the digital assistant can vary in different implementations. For instance, in some examples, the DA client is a thin-client that provides only user-facing input and output processing functions, and delegates all other functionalities of the digital assistant to a backend server. 2. Electronic Devices [0052] Attention is now directed toward embodiments of electronic devices for implementing the client-side portion of a digital assistant. FIG.2A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 200 with touch-sensitive display system 212 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 212 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience and is sometimes known as or called a “touch-sensitive display system.” Device 200 includes memory 202 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums), memory controller 222, one or more processing units (CPUs) 220, peripherals interface 218, RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, input/output (I/O) subsystem 206, other input control devices 216, and external port 224. Device 200 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 264. Device 200 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 200 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200). Device 200 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs on device 200 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch- sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 212 of device 200 or touchpad 455 of device 400). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 203. [0053] As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure- sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch- sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch- sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch- sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button). [0054] As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user’s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch- sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user. [0055] It should be appreciated that device 200 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 200 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG. 2A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application-specific integrated circuits. [0056] Memory 202 includes one or more computer-readable storage mediums. The computer-readable storage mediums are, for example, tangible and non-transitory. Memory 202 includes high-speed random access memory and also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 222 controls access to memory 202 by other components of device 200. [0057] In some examples, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 202 is used to store instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of processes described below) for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor-containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions. In other examples, the instructions (e.g., for performing aspects of the processes described below) are stored on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium (not shown) of the server system 108 or are divided between the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 202 and the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of server system 108. [0058] Peripherals interface 218 is used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU 220 and memory 202. The one or more processors 220 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 202 to perform various functions for device 200 and to process data. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 218, CPU 220, and memory controller 222 are implemented on a single chip, such as chip 204. In some other embodiments, they are implemented on separate chips. [0059] RF (radio frequency) circuitry 208 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 208 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry 208 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The RF circuitry 208 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communication (NFC) fields, such as by a short-range communication radio. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, and/or IEEE 802.11ac), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. [0060] Audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, and microphone 213 provide an audio interface between a user and device 200. Audio circuitry 210 receives audio data from peripherals interface 218, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 211. Speaker 211 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 210 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 213 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 210 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 218 for processing. Audio data are retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 202 and/or RF circuitry 208 by peripherals interface 218. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 210 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 312, FIG.3). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 210 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone). [0061] I/O subsystem 206 couples input/output peripherals on device 200, such as touch screen 212 and other input control devices 216, to peripherals interface 218. I/O subsystem 206 optionally includes display controller 256, optical sensor controller 258, intensity sensor controller 259, haptic feedback controller 261, and one or more input controllers 260 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 260 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 216. The other input control devices 216 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 260 are, optionally, coupled to any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 308, FIG.3) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 211 and/or microphone 213. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 306, FIG. 3). [0062] A quick press of the push button disengages a lock of touch screen 212 or begin a process that uses gestures on the touch screen to unlock the device, as described in U.S. Patent Application 11/322,549, “Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image,” filed December 23, 2005, U.S. Pat. No.7,657,849, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A longer press of the push button (e.g., 306) turns power to device 200 on or off. The user is able to customize a functionality of one or more of the buttons. Touch screen 212 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards. [0063] Touch-sensitive display 212 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 256 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch screen 212. Touch screen 212 displays visual output to the user. The visual output includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output correspond to user- interface objects. [0064] Touch screen 212 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 202) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch screen 212 and convert the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) that are displayed on touch screen 212. In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch screen 212 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user. [0065] Touch screen 212 uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies may be used in other embodiments. Touch screen 212 and display controller 256 detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 212. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. [0066] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is analogous to the multi-touch sensitive touchpads described in the following U.S. Patents: 6,323,846 (Westerman et al.), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or 6,677,932 (Westerman), and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 212 displays visual output from device 200, whereas touch- sensitive touchpads do not provide visual output. [0067] A touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 212 is as described in the following applications: (1) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/381,313, “Multipoint Touch Surface Controller,” filed May 2, 2006; (2) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, “Multipoint Touchscreen,” filed May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/903,964, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed July 30, 2004; (4) U.S. Patent Application No.11/048,264, “Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed January 31, 2005; (5) U.S. Patent Application No.11/038,590, “Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive Input Devices,” filed January 18, 2005; (6) U.S. Patent Application No.11/228,758, “Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface,” filed September 16, 2005; (7) U.S. Patent Application No.11/228,700, “Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface,” filed September 16, 2005; (8) U.S. Patent Application No.11/228,737, “Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard,” filed September 16, 2005; and (9) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/367,749, “Multi-Functional Hand-Held Device,” filed March 3, 2006. All of these applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. [0068] Touch screen 212 has, for example, a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user makes contact with touch screen 212 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user. [0069] In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 200 includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch screen 212 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen. [0070] Device 200 also includes power system 262 for powering the various components. Power system 262 includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices. [0071] Device 200 also includes one or more optical sensors 264. FIG.2A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 258 in I/O subsystem 206. Optical sensor 264 includes charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor 264 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 243 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 264 captures still images or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212 on the front of the device so that the touch screen display is used as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user’s image is obtained for video conferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the position of optical sensor 264 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and the sensor in the device housing) so that a single optical sensor 264 is used along with the touch screen display for both video conferencing and still and/or video image acquisition. [0072] Device 200 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265. FIG. 2A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 259 in I/O subsystem 206. Contact intensity sensor 265 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor 265 receives contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200. [0073] Device 200 also includes one or more proximity sensors 266. FIG. 2A shows proximity sensor 266 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, proximity sensor 266 is coupled to input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Proximity sensor 266 is performed as described in U.S. Patent Application Nos.11/241,839, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; 11/240,788, “Proximity Detector In Handheld Device”; 11/620,702, “Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output”; 11/586,862, “Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices”; and 11/638,251, “Methods And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals,” which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 212 when the multifunction device is placed near the user’s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call). [0074] Device 200 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 267. FIG. 2A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 261 in I/O subsystem 206. Tactile output generator 267 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact intensity sensor 265 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 233 and generates tactile outputs on device 200 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 200. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 200) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 200). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 200, opposite touch screen display 212, which is located on the front of device 200. [0075] Device 200 also includes one or more accelerometers 268. FIG. 2A shows accelerometer 268 coupled to peripherals interface 218. Alternately, accelerometer 268 is coupled to an input controller 260 in I/O subsystem 206. Accelerometer 268 performs, for example, as described in U.S. Patent Publication No. 20050190059, “Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices,” and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20060017692, “Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer,” both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 200 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 268, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 200. [0076] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 202 include operating system 226, communication module (or set of instructions) 228, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 230, graphics module (or set of instructions) 232, text input module (or set of instructions) 234, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 235, Digital Assistant Client Module 229, and applications (or sets of instructions) 236. Further, memory 202 stores data and models, such as user data and models 231. Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 202 (FIG.2A) or 470 (FIG.4) stores device/global internal state 257, as shown in FIGS. 2A and 4. Device/global internal state 257 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch screen display 212; sensor state, including information obtained from the device’s various sensors and input control devices 216; and location information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude. [0077] Operating system 226 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, iOS, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components. [0078] Communication module 228 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 224 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 208 and/or external port 224. External port 224 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with, the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices. [0079] Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects contact with touch screen 212 (in conjunction with display controller 256) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 230 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact, such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 230 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 230 and display controller 256 detect contact on a touchpad. [0080] In some embodiments, contact/motion module 230 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 200). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter). [0081] Contact/motion module 230 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (liftoff) event. [0082] Graphics module 232 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 212 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including ,without limitation, text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like. [0083] In some embodiments, graphics module 232 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 232 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 256. [0084] Haptic feedback module 233 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 267 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 200 in response to user interactions with device 200 [0085] Text input module 234, which is, in some examples, a component of graphics module 232, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 237, email 240, IM 241, browser 247, and any other application that needs text input). [0086] GPS module 235 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 238 for use in location-based dialing; to camera 243 as picture/video metadata; and to applications that provide location- based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets). [0087] Digital assistant client module 229 includes various client-side digital assistant instructions to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant. For example, digital assistant client module 229 is capable of accepting voice input (e.g., speech input), text input, touch input, and/or gestural input through various user interfaces (e.g., microphone 213, accelerometer(s) 268, touch-sensitive display system 212, optical sensor(s) 264, other input control devices 216, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200. Digital assistant client module 229 is also capable of providing output in audio (e.g., speech output), visual, and/or tactile forms through various output interfaces (e.g., speaker 211, touch-sensitive display system 212, tactile output generator(s) 267, etc.) of portable multifunction device 200. For example, output is provided as voice, sound, alerts, text messages, menus, graphics, videos, animations, vibrations, and/or combinations of two or more of the above. During operation, digital assistant client module 229 communicates with DA server 106 using RF circuitry 208. [0088] User data and models 231 include various data associated with the user (e.g., user- specific vocabulary data, user preference data, user-specified name pronunciations, data from the user’s electronic address book, to-do lists, shopping lists, etc.) to provide the client-side functionalities of the digital assistant. Further, user data and models 231 include various models (e.g., speech recognition models, statistical language models, natural language processing models, ontology, task flow models, service models, etc.) for processing user input and determining user intent. [0089] In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 utilizes the various sensors, subsystems, and peripheral devices of portable multifunction device 200 to gather additional information from the surrounding environment of the portable multifunction device 200 to establish a context associated with a user the current user interaction and/or the current user input. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 provides the contextual information or a subset thereof with the user input to DA server 106 to help infer the user’s intent. In some examples, the digital assistant also uses the contextual information to determine how to prepare and deliver outputs to the user. Contextual information is referred to as context data. [0090] In some examples, the contextual information that accompanies the user input includes sensor information, e.g., lighting, ambient noise, ambient temperature, images or videos of the surrounding environment, etc. In some examples, the contextual information can also include the physical state of the device, e.g., device orientation, device location, device temperature, power level, speed, acceleration, motion patterns, cellular signals strength, etc. In some examples, information related to the software state of DA server 106, e.g., running processes, installed programs, past and present network activities, background services, error logs, resources usage, etc., and of portable multifunction device 200 is provided to DA server 106 as contextual information associated with a user input. [0091] In some examples, the digital assistant client module 229 selectively provides information (e.g., user data 231) stored on the portable multifunction device 200 in response to requests from DA server 106. In some examples, digital assistant client module 229 also elicits additional input from the user via a natural language dialogue or other user interfaces upon request by DA server 106. Digital assistant client module 229 passes the additional input to DA server 106 to help DA server 106 in intent deduction and/or fulfillment of the user’s intent expressed in the user request. [0092] A more detailed description of a digital assistant is described below with reference to FIGS. 7A-7C. It should be recognized that digital assistant client module 229 can include any number of the sub-modules of digital assistant module 726 described below. [0093] Applications 236 include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof: □ Contacts module 237 (sometimes called an address book or contact list); □ Telephone module 238; □ Video conference module 239; □ E-mail client module 240; □ Instant messaging (IM) module 241; □ Workout support module 242; □ Camera module 243 for still and/or video images; □ Image management module 244; □ Video player module; □ Music player module; □ Browser module 247; □ Calendar module 248; □ Widget modules 249, which includes, in some examples, one or more of: weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249- 4, dictionary widget 249-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user- created widgets 249-6; □ Widget creator module 250 for making user-created widgets 249-6; □ Search module 251; □ Video and music player module 252, which merges video player module and music player module; □ Notes module 253; □ Map module 254; and/or □ Online video module 255. [0094] Examples of other applications 236 that are stored in memory 202 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication. [0095] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, contacts module 237 are used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 292 of contacts module 237 in memory 202 or memory 470), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e- mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 238, video conference module 239, e-mail 240, or IM 241; and so forth. [0096] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, telephone module 238 are used to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in contacts module 237, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies. [0097] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, microphone 213, touch screen 212, display controller 256, optical sensor 264, optical sensor controller 258, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, contacts module 237, and telephone module 238, video conference module 239 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions. [0098] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, e-mail client module 240 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 244, e-mail client module 240 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 243 [0099] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, the instant messaging module 241 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in an MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS). [0100] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, GPS module 235, map module 254, and music player module, workout support module 242 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (sports devices); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store, and transmit workout data. [0101] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, optical sensor(s) 264, optical sensor controller 258, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and image management module 244, camera module 243 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 202, modify characteristics of a still image or video, or delete a still image or video from memory 202. [0102] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and camera module 243, image management module 244 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images. [0103] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, browser module 247 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages. [0104] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, e-mail client module 240, and browser module 247, calendar module 248 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions. [0105] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and browser module 247, widget modules 249 are mini-applications that can be downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 249-1, stocks widget 249-2, calculator widget 249-3, alarm clock widget 249-4, and dictionary widget 249-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 249-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets). [0106] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, and browser module 247, the widget creator module 250 are used by a user to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget). [0107] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, search module 251 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 202 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions. [0108] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, RF circuitry 208, and browser module 247, video and music player module 252 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch screen 212 or on an external, connected display via external port 224). In some embodiments, device 200 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.). [0109] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, and text input module 234, notes module 253 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to-do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions. [0110] In conjunction with RF circuitry 208, touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, text input module 234, GPS module 235, and browser module 247, map module 254 are used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions. [0111] In conjunction with touch screen 212, display controller 256, contact/motion module 230, graphics module 232, audio circuitry 210, speaker 211, RF circuitry 208, text input module 234, e-mail client module 240, and browser module 247, online video module 255 includes instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen or on an external, connected display via external port 224), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 241, rather than e-mail client module 240, is used to send a link to a particular online video. Additional description of the online video application can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No.60/936,562, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed June 20, 2007, and U.S. Patent Application No. 11/968,067, “Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos,” filed December 31, 2007, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. [0112] Each of the above-identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules can be combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. For example, video player module can be combined with music player module into a single module (e.g., video and music player module 252, FIG. 2A). In some embodiments, memory 202 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 202 stores additional modules and data structures not described above. [0113] In some embodiments, device 200 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 200, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 200 is reduced. [0114] The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 200 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 200. In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad. [0115] FIG.2B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 202 (FIG.2A) or 470 (FIG.4) includes event sorter 270 (e.g., in operating system 226) and a respective application 236-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 237-251, 255, 480-490). [0116] Event sorter 270 receives event information and determines the application 236-1 and application view 291 of application 236-1 to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter 270 includes event monitor 271 and event dispatcher module 274. In some embodiments, application 236-1 includes application internal state 292, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display 212 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 257 is used by event sorter 270 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 292 is used by event sorter 270 to determine application views 291 to which to deliver event information. [0117] In some embodiments, application internal state 292 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 236-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 236-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 236-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user. [0118] Event monitor 271 receives event information from peripherals interface 218. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch- sensitive display 212, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 218 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 206 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 266, accelerometer(s) 268, and/or microphone 213 (through audio circuitry 210). Information that peripherals interface 218 receives from I/O subsystem 206 includes information from touch- sensitive display 212 or a touch-sensitive surface. [0119] In some embodiments, event monitor 271 sends requests to the peripherals interface 218 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 218 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration). [0120] In some embodiments, event sorter 270 also includes a hit view determination module 272 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 273. [0121] Hit view determination module 272 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views when touch-sensitive display 212 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display. [0122] Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs is determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture. [0123] Hit view determination module 272 receives information related to sub events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 272 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (e.g., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub- events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module 272, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view. [0124] Active event recognizer determination module 273 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 273 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views. [0125] Event dispatcher module 274 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 280). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 273, event dispatcher module 274 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 273. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 274 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver 282. [0126] In some embodiments, operating system 226 includes event sorter 270. Alternatively, application 236-1 includes event sorter 270. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 270 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 202, such as contact/motion module 230. [0127] In some embodiments, application 236-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 290 and one or more application views 291, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application’s user interface. Each application view 291 of the application 236-1 includes one or more event recognizers 280. Typically, a respective application view 291 includes a plurality of event recognizers 280. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 280 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 236-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 290 includes one or more of: data updater 276, object updater 277, GUI updater 278, and/or event data 279 received from event sorter 270. Event handler 290 utilizes or calls data updater 276, object updater 277, or GUI updater 278 to update the application internal state 292. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 291 include one or more respective event handlers 290. Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 276, object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a respective application view 291. [0128] A respective event recognizer 280 receives event information (e.g., event data 279) from event sorter 270 and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 280 includes event receiver 282 and event comparator 284. In some embodiments, event recognizer 280 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 283, and event delivery instructions 288 (which include sub-event delivery instructions). [0129] Event receiver 282 receives event information from event sorter 270. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device. [0130] Event comparator 284 compares the event information to predefined event or sub- event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 284 includes event definitions 286. Event definitions 286 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (287-1), event 2 (287- 2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event (287) include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (287-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (287-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch- sensitive display 212, and liftoff of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 290. [0131] In some embodiments, event definition 287 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 212, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 212, event comparator 284 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 290, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 290 should be activated. For example, event comparator 284 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test. [0132] In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event (287) also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type. [0133] When a respective event recognizer 280 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 286, the respective event recognizer 280 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture. [0134] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 includes metadata 283 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 283 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy. [0135] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 activates event handler 290 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 280 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 290. Activating an event handler 290 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 280 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 290 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process. [0136] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 288 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process. [0137] In some embodiments, data updater 276 creates and updates data used in application 236-1. For example, data updater 276 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 237, or stores a video file used in video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 277 creates and updates objects used in application 236-1. For example, object updater 277 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 278 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 278 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 232 for display on a touch- sensitive display. [0138] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 290 includes or has access to data updater 276 object updater 277 and GUI updater 278 In some embodiments data updater 276 object updater 277, and GUI updater 278 are included in a single module of a respective application 236-1 or application view 291. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules. [0139] It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 200 with input devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc. on touchpads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized. [0140] FIG.3 illustrates a portable multifunction device 200 having a touch screen 212 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 300. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 302 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 303 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward), and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 200. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap. [0141] Device 200 also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 304. As described previously, menu button 304 is used to navigate to any application 236 in a set of applications that is executed on device 200. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on touch screen 212. [0142] In one embodiment, device 200 includes touch screen 212, menu button 304, push button 306 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 308, subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 310, headset jack 312, and docking/charging external port 224. Push button 306 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In an alternative embodiment, device 200 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 213. Device 200 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 265 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch screen 212 and/or one or more tactile output generators 267 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 200. [0143] FIG.4 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 400 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 400 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 400 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 410, one or more network or other communications interfaces 460, memory 470, and one or more communication buses 420 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 420 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 400 includes input/output (I/O) interface 430 comprising display 440, which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 430 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 450 and touchpad 455, tactile output generator 457 for generating tactile outputs on device 400 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 267 described above with reference to FIG. 2A), sensors 459 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 265 described above with reference to FIG.2A). Memory 470 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non- volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 470 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 410. In some embodiments, memory 470 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs modules and data structures stored in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 470 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200. For example, memory 470 of device 400 optionally stores drawing module 480, presentation module 482, word processing module 484, website creation module 486, disk authoring module 488, and/or spreadsheet module 490, while memory 202 of portable multifunction device 200 (FIG. 2A) optionally does not store these modules. [0144] Each of the above-identified elements in FIG. 4 is, in some examples, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above-identified modules or programs (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 470 stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 470 stores additional modules and data structures not described above. [0145] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces that can be implemented on, for example, portable multifunction device 200. [0146] FIG.5A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 200 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are implemented on device 400. In some embodiments, user interface 500 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof: [0147] Signal strength indicator(s) 502 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals; □ Time 504; □ Bluetooth indicator 505; □ Battery status indicator 506; □ Tray 508 with icons for frequently used applications, such as: o Icon 516 for telephone module 238, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 514 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 518 for e-mail client module 240, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 510 of the number of unread e-mails; o Icon 520 for browser module 247, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 522 for video and music player module 252, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 252, labeled “iPod;” and □ Icons for other applications, such as: o Icon 524 for IM module 241, labeled “Messages;” o Icon 526 for calendar module 248, labeled “Calendar;” o Icon 528 for image management module 244, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 530 for camera module 243, labeled “Camera;” o Icon 532 for online video module 255, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 534 for stocks widget 249-2, labeled “Stocks;” o Icon 536 for map module 254, labeled “Maps;” o Icon 538 for weather widget 249-1, labeled “Weather;” o Icon 540 for alarm clock widget 249-4, labeled “Clock;” o Icon 542 for workout support module 242, labeled “Workout Support;” o Icon 544 for notes module 253, labeled “Notes;” and o Icon 546 for a settings application or module, labeled “Settings,” which provides access to settings for device 200 and its various applications 236. [0148] It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG.5A are merely exemplary. For example, icon 522 for video and music player module 252 is optionally labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon. [0149] FIG.5B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 400, FIG. 4) with a touch-sensitive surface 551 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 455, FIG.4) that is separate from the display 550 (e.g., touch screen display 212). Device 400 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 459) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 551 and/or one or more tactile output generators 457 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 400. [0150] Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 212 (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 5B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 551 in FIG.5B) has a primary axis (e.g., 552 in FIG. 5B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 553 in FIG. 5B) on the display (e.g., 550). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 560 and 562 in FIG.5B) with the touch- sensitive surface 551 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 5B, 560 corresponds to 568 and 562 corresponds to 570). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 560 and 562, and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch- sensitive surface (e.g., 551 in FIG.5B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 550 in FIG. 5B) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein. [0151] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously. [0152] FIG.6A illustrates exemplary personal electronic device 600. Device 600 includes body 602. In some embodiments, device 600 includes some or all of the features described with respect to devices 200 and 400 (e.g., FIGS. 2A-4). In some embodiments, device 600 has touch-sensitive display screen 604, hereafter touch screen 604. Alternatively, or in addition to touch screen 604, device 600 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As with devices 200 and 400, in some embodiments, touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) has one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensity of contacts (e.g., touches) being applied. The one or more intensity sensors of touch screen 604 (or the touch-sensitive surface) provide output data that represents the intensity of touches. The user interface of device 600 responds to touches based on their intensity, meaning that touches of different intensities can invoke different user interface operations on device 600. [0153] Techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in related applications: International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/040061, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” filed May 8, 2013, and International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2013/069483, titled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships,” filed November 11, 2013, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. [0154] In some embodiments, device 600 has one or more input mechanisms 606 and 608. Input mechanisms 606 and 608, if included, are physical. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device 600 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, can permit attachment of device 600 with, for example, hats, eyewear, earrings, necklaces, shirts, jackets, bracelets, watch straps, chains, trousers, belts, shoes, purses, backpacks, and so forth. These attachment mechanisms permit device 600 to be worn by a user. [0155] FIG.6B depicts exemplary personal electronic device 600. In some embodiments, device 600 includes some or all of the components described with respect to FIGS.2A, 2B, and 4. Device 600 has bus 612 that operatively couples I/O section 614 with one or more computer processors 616 and memory 618. I/O section 614 is connected to display 604, which can have touch-sensitive component 622 and, optionally, touch-intensity sensitive component 624. In addition, I/O section 614 is connected with communication unit 630 for receiving application and operating system data, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular, and/or other wireless communication techniques. Device 600 includes input mechanisms 606 and/or 608. Input mechanism 606 is a rotatable input device or a depressible and rotatable input device, for example. Input mechanism 608 is a button, in some examples. [0156] Input mechanism 608 is a microphone, in some examples. Personal electronic device 600 includes, for example, various sensors, such as GPS sensor 632, accelerometer 634, directional sensor 640 (e.g., compass), gyroscope 636, motion sensor 638, and/or a combination thereof, all of which are operatively connected to I/O section 614. [0157] Memory 618 of personal electronic device 600 is a non-transitory computer- readable storage medium, for storing computer-executable instructions, which, when executed by one or more computer processors 616, for example, cause the computer processors to perform the techniques and processes described below. The computer- executable instructions, for example, are also stored and/or transported within any non- transitory computer-readable storage medium for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, such as a computer-based system, processor- containing system, or other system that can fetch the instructions from the instruction execution system, apparatus, or device and execute the instructions. Personal electronic device 600 is not limited to the components and configuration of FIG. 6B, but can include other or additional components in multiple configurations. [0158] As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object that is, for example, displayed on the display screen of devices 200, 400, 600, 800, and/or 900 (FIGS.2A, 4, 6A-6B, 8A-8H, 9A-9F, and 10A-10D). For example, an image (e.g., icon), a button, and text (e.g., hyperlink) each constitutes an affordance. [0159] As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 455 in FIG. 4 or touch-sensitive surface 551 in FIG.5B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 212 in FIG. 2A or touch screen 212 in FIG. 5A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a detected contact on the touch screen acts as a “focus selector” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user’s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device). [0160] As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective operation or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation. [0161] In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface receives a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location, at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location is based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. [0162] The intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface is characterized relative to one or more intensity thresholds, such as a contact-detection intensity threshold, a light press intensity threshold, a deep press intensity threshold, and/or one or more other intensity thresholds. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures. [0163] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold and the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold and the light press intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is zero. In some embodiments, the contact-detection intensity threshold is greater than zero. [0164] In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input). [0165] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances). [0166] For ease of explanation, the descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting either: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. 3. Digital Assistant System [0167] FIG.7A illustrates a block diagram of digital assistant system 700 in accordance with various examples. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a standalone computer system. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 is distributed across multiple computers. In some examples, some of the modules and functions of the digital assistant are divided into a server portion and a client portion, where the client portion resides on one or more user devices (e.g., devices 104, 122, 200, 400, 600, 800, or 900) and communicates with the server portion (e.g., server system 108) through one or more networks, e.g., as shown in FIG. 1. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 is an implementation of server system 108 (and/or DA server 106) shown in FIG. 1. It should be noted that digital assistant system 700 is only one example of a digital assistant system, and that digital assistant system 700 can have more or fewer components than shown, can combine two or more components, or can have a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG.7A are implemented in hardware, software instructions for execution by one or more processors, firmware, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits, or a combination thereof. [0168] Digital assistant system 700 includes memory 702, one or more processors 704, input/output (I/O) interface 706, and network communications interface 708. These components can communicate with one another over one or more communication buses or signal lines 710. [0169] In some examples, memory 702 includes a non-transitory computer-readable medium, such as high-speed random access memory and/or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium (e.g., one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices). [0170] In some examples, I/O interface 706 couples input/output devices 716 of digital assistant system 700, such as displays, keyboards, touch screens, and microphones, to user interface module 722. I/O interface 706, in conjunction with user interface module 722, receives user inputs (e.g., voice input, keyboard inputs, touch inputs, etc.) and processes them accordingly. In some examples, e.g., when the digital assistant is implemented on a standalone user device, digital assistant system 700 includes any of the components and I/O communication interfaces described with respect to devices 200 400 600 800 or 900 in FIGS.2A, 4, 6A-6B, 8A-8H, 9A-9F, and 10A-10D. In some examples, digital assistant system 700 represents the server portion of a digital assistant implementation, and can interact with the user through a client-side portion residing on a user device (e.g., devices 104, 200, 400, 600, 800, or 900). [0171] In some examples, the network communications interface 708 includes wired communication port(s) 712 and/or wireless transmission and reception circuitry 714. The wired communication port(s) receives and send communication signals via one or more wired interfaces, e.g., Ethernet, Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc. The wireless circuitry 714 receives and sends RF signals and/or optical signals from/to communications networks and other communications devices. The wireless communications use any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols, and technologies, such as GSM, EDGE, CDMA, TDMA, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, VoIP, Wi-MAX, or any other suitable communication protocol. Network communications interface 708 enables communication between digital assistant system 700 with networks, such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices. [0172] In some examples, memory 702, or the computer-readable storage media of memory 702, stores programs, modules, instructions, and data structures including all or a subset of: operating system 718, communications module 720, user interface module 722, one or more applications 724, and digital assistant module 726. In particular, memory 702, or the computer-readable storage media of memory 702, stores instructions for performing the processes described below. One or more processors 704 execute these programs, modules, and instructions, and reads/writes from/to the data structures. [0173] Operating system 718 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, iOS, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communications between various hardware, firmware, and software components. [0174] Communications module 720 facilitates communications between digital assistant system 700 with other devices over network communications interface 708. For example, communications module 720 communicates with RF circuitry 208 of electronic devices such as devices 200, 400, and 600 shown in FIGS. 2A, 4, 6A-6B, respectively. Communications module 720 also includes various components for handling data received by wireless circuitry 714 and/or wired communications port 712. [0175] User interface module 722 receives commands and/or inputs from a user via I/O interface 706 (e.g., from a keyboard, touch screen, pointing device, controller, and/or microphone), and generate user interface objects on a display. User interface module 722 also prepares and delivers outputs (e.g., speech, sound, animation, text, icons, vibrations, haptic feedback, light, etc.) to the user via the I/O interface 706 (e.g., through displays, audio channels, speakers, touch-pads, etc.). [0176] Applications 724 include programs and/or modules that are configured to be executed by one or more processors 704. For example, if the digital assistant system is implemented on a standalone user device, applications 724 include user applications, such as games, a calendar application, a navigation application, or an email application. If digital assistant system 700 is implemented on a server, applications 724 include resource management applications, diagnostic applications, or scheduling applications, for example. [0177] Memory 702 also stores digital assistant module 726 (or the server portion of a digital assistant). In some examples, digital assistant module 726 includes the following sub- modules, or a subset or superset thereof: input/output processing module 728, speech-to-text (STT) processing module 730, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738, and speech synthesis processing module 740. Each of these modules has access to one or more of the following systems or data and models of the digital assistant module 726, or a subset or superset thereof: ontology 760, vocabulary index 744, user data 748, task flow models 754, service models 756, and ASR systems 758. [0178] In some examples, using the processing modules, data, and models implemented in digital assistant module 726, the digital assistant can perform at least some of the following: converting speech input into text; identifying a user’s intent expressed in a natural language input received from the user; actively eliciting and obtaining information needed to fully infer the user’s intent (e.g., by disambiguating words, games, intentions, etc.); determining the task flow for fulfilling the inferred intent; and executing the task flow to fulfill the inferred intent. [0179] In some examples, as shown in FIG.7B, I/O processing module 728 interacts with the user through I/O devices 716 in FIG 7A or with a user device (e g devices 104 200 400, or 600) through network communications interface 708 in FIG. 7A to obtain user input (e.g., a speech input) and to provide responses (e.g., as speech outputs) to the user input. I/O processing module 728 optionally obtains contextual information associated with the user input from the user device, along with or shortly after the receipt of the user input. The contextual information includes user-specific data, vocabulary, and/or preferences relevant to the user input. In some examples, the contextual information also includes software and hardware states of the user device at the time the user request is received, and/or information related to the surrounding environment of the user at the time that the user request was received. In some examples, I/O processing module 728 also sends follow-up questions to, and receive answers from, the user regarding the user request. When a user request is received by I/O processing module 728 and the user request includes speech input, I/O processing module 728 forwards the speech input to STT processing module 730 (or speech recognizer) for speech-to-text conversions. [0180] STT processing module 730 includes one or more ASR systems 758. The one or more ASR systems 758 can process the speech input that is received through I/O processing module 728 to produce a recognition result. Each ASR system 758 includes a front-end speech pre-processor. The front-end speech pre-processor extracts representative features from the speech input. For example, the front-end speech pre-processor performs a Fourier transform on the speech input to extract spectral features that characterize the speech input as a sequence of representative multi-dimensional vectors. Further, each ASR system 758 includes one or more speech recognition models (e.g., acoustic models and/or language models) and implements one or more speech recognition engines. Examples of speech recognition models include Hidden Markov Models, Gaussian-Mixture Models, Deep Neural Network Models, n-gram language models, and other statistical models. Examples of speech recognition engines include the dynamic time warping based engines and weighted finite- state transducers (WFST) based engines. The one or more speech recognition models and the one or more speech recognition engines are used to process the extracted representative features of the front-end speech pre-processor to produce intermediate recognitions results (e.g., phonemes, phonemic strings, and sub-words), and ultimately, text recognition results (e.g., words, word strings, or sequence of tokens). In some examples, the speech input is processed at least partially by a third-party service or on the user’s device (e.g., device 104, 200, 400, or 600) to produce the recognition result. Once STT processing module 730 produces recognition results containing a text string (e g words or sequence of words or sequence of tokens), the recognition result is passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction. In some examples, STT processing module 730 produces multiple candidate text representations of the speech input. Each candidate text representation is a sequence of words or tokens corresponding to the speech input. In some examples, each candidate text representation is associated with a speech recognition confidence score. Based on the speech recognition confidence scores, STT processing module 730 ranks the candidate text representations and provides the n-best (e.g., n highest ranked) candidate text representation(s) to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction, where n is a predetermined integer greater than zero. For example, in one example, only the highest ranked (n=1) candidate text representation is passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction. In another example, the five highest ranked (n=5) candidate text representations are passed to natural language processing module 732 for intent deduction. [0181] More details on the speech-to-text processing are described in U.S. Utility Application Serial No. 13/236,942 for “Consolidating Speech Recognition Results,” filed on September 20, 2011, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. [0182] In some examples, STT processing module 730 includes and/or accesses a vocabulary of recognizable words via phonetic alphabet conversion module 731. Each vocabulary word is associated with one or more candidate pronunciations of the word represented in a speech recognition phonetic alphabet. In particular, the vocabulary of recognizable words includes a word that is associated with a plurality of candidate pronunciations. For example, the vocabulary includes the word “tomato” that is associated with the candidate pronunciations of /t^'me^^o^/ and /t^'m^to^/. Further, vocabulary words are associated with custom candidate pronunciations that are based on previous speech inputs from the user. Such custom candidate pronunciations are stored in STT processing module 730 and are associated with a particular user via the user’s profile on the device. In some examples, the candidate pronunciations for words are determined based on the spelling of the word and one or more linguistic and/or phonetic rules. In some examples, the candidate pronunciations are manually generated, e.g., based on known canonical pronunciations. [0183] In some examples, the candidate pronunciations are ranked based on the commonness of the candidate pronunciation. For example, the candidate pronunciation /t^'me^^o^/ is ranked higher than /t^'m^to^/, because the former is a more commonly used pronunciation (e.g., among all users, for users in a particular geographical region, or for any other appropriate subset of users). In some examples, candidate pronunciations are ranked based on whether the candidate pronunciation is a custom candidate pronunciation associated with the user. For example, custom candidate pronunciations are ranked higher than canonical candidate pronunciations. This can be useful for recognizing proper nouns having a unique pronunciation that deviates from canonical pronunciation. In some examples, candidate pronunciations are associated with one or more speech characteristics, such as geographic origin, nationality, or ethnicity. For example, the candidate pronunciation /t^'me^^o^/ is associated with the United States, whereas the candidate pronunciation /t^'m^to^/ is associated with Great Britain. Further, the rank of the candidate pronunciation is based on one or more characteristics (e.g., geographic origin, nationality, ethnicity, etc.) of the user stored in the user’s profile on the device. For example, it can be determined from the user’s profile that the user is associated with the United States. Based on the user being associated with the United States, the candidate pronunciation /t^'me^^o^/ (associated with the United States) is ranked higher than the candidate pronunciation /t^'m^to^/ (associated with Great Britain). In some examples, one of the ranked candidate pronunciations is selected as a predicted pronunciation (e.g., the most likely pronunciation). [0184] When a speech input is received, STT processing module 730 is used to determine the phonemes corresponding to the speech input (e.g., using an acoustic model), and then attempt to determine words that match the phonemes (e.g., using a language model). For example, if STT processing module 730 first identifies the sequence of phonemes /t^'me^^o^/ corresponding to a portion of the speech input, it can then determine, based on vocabulary index 744, that this sequence corresponds to the word “tomato.” [0185] In some examples, STT processing module 730 uses approximate matching techniques to determine words in an utterance. Thus, for example, the STT processing module 730 determines that the sequence of phonemes /t^'me^^o^/ corresponds to the word “tomato,” even if that particular sequence of phonemes is not one of the candidate sequence of phonemes for that word. [0186] Natural language processing module 732 (“natural language processor”) of the digital assistant takes the n-best candidate text representation(s) (“word sequence(s)” or “token sequence(s)”) generated by STT processing module 730, and attempts to associate each of the candidate text representations with one or more “actionable intents” recognized by the digital assistant. An “actionable intent” (or “user intent”) represents a task that can be performed by the digital assistant, and can have an associated task flow implemented in task flow models 754. The associated task flow is a series of programmed actions and steps that the digital assistant takes in order to perform the task. The scope of a digital assistant’s capabilities is dependent on the number and variety of task flows that have been implemented and stored in task flow models 754, or in other words, on the number and variety of “actionable intents” that the digital assistant recognizes. The effectiveness of the digital assistant, however, also dependents on the assistant’s ability to infer the correct “actionable intent(s)” from the user request expressed in natural language. [0187] In some examples, in addition to the sequence of words or tokens obtained from STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 also receives contextual information associated with the user request, e.g., from I/O processing module 728. The natural language processing module 732 optionally uses the contextual information to clarify, supplement, and/or further define the information contained in the candidate text representations received from STT processing module 730. The contextual information includes, for example, user preferences, hardware, and/or software states of the user device, sensor information collected before, during, or shortly after the user request, prior interactions (e.g., dialogue) between the digital assistant and the user, and the like. As described herein, contextual information is, in some examples, dynamic, and changes with time, location, content of the dialogue, and other factors. [0188] In some examples, the natural language processing is based on, e.g., ontology 760. Ontology 760 is a hierarchical structure containing many nodes, each node representing either an “actionable intent” or a “property” relevant to one or more of the “actionable intents” or other “properties.” As noted above, an “actionable intent” represents a task that the digital assistant is capable of performing, i.e., it is “actionable” or can be acted on. A “property” represents a parameter associated with an actionable intent or a sub-aspect of another property. A linkage between an actionable intent node and a property node in ontology 760 defines how a parameter represented by the property node pertains to the task represented by the actionable intent node. [0189] In some examples, ontology 760 is made up of actionable intent nodes and property nodes. Within ontology 760, each actionable intent node is linked to one or more property nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes. Similarly, each property node is linked to one or more actionable intent nodes either directly or through one or more intermediate property nodes. For example, as shown in FIG. 7C, ontology 760 includes a “restaurant reservation” node (i.e., an actionable intent node). Property nodes “restaurant,” “date/time” (for the reservation), and “party size” are each directly linked to the actionable intent node (i.e., the “restaurant reservation” node). [0190] In addition, property nodes “cuisine,” “price range,” “phone number,” and “location” are sub-nodes of the property node “restaurant,” and are each linked to the “restaurant reservation” node (i.e., the actionable intent node) through the intermediate property node “restaurant.” For another example, as shown in FIG.7C, ontology 760 also includes a “set reminder” node (i.e., another actionable intent node). Property nodes “date/time” (for setting the reminder) and “subject” (for the reminder) are each linked to the “set reminder” node. Since the property “date/time” is relevant to both the task of making a restaurant reservation and the task of setting a reminder, the property node “date/time” is linked to both the “restaurant reservation” node and the “set reminder” node in ontology 760. [0191] An actionable intent node, along with its linked property nodes, is described as a “domain.” In the present discussion, each domain is associated with a respective actionable intent, and refers to the group of nodes (and the relationships there between) associated with the particular actionable intent. For example, ontology 760 shown in FIG. 7C includes an example of restaurant reservation domain 762 and an example of reminder domain 764 within ontology 760. The restaurant reservation domain includes the actionable intent node “restaurant reservation,” property nodes “restaurant,” “date/time,” and “party size,” and sub- property nodes “cuisine,” “price range,” “phone number,” and “location.” Reminder domain 764 includes the actionable intent node “set reminder,” and property nodes “subject” and “date/time.” In some examples, ontology 760 is made up of many domains. Each domain shares one or more property nodes with one or more other domains. For example, the “date/time” property node is associated with many different domains (e.g., a scheduling domain, a travel reservation domain, a movie ticket domain, etc.), in addition to restaurant reservation domain 762 and reminder domain 764. [0192] While FIG. 7C illustrates two example domains within ontology 760, other domains include, for example, “find a movie,” “initiate a phone call,” “find directions,” “schedule a meeting,” “send a message,” and “provide an answer to a question,” “read a list,” “providing navigation instructions,” “provide instructions for a task” and so on. A “send a message” domain is associated with a “send a message” actionable intent node, and further includes property nodes such as “recipient(s),” “message type,” and “message body.” The property node “recipient” is further defined, for example, by the sub-property nodes such as “recipient name” and “message address.” [0193] In some examples, ontology 760 includes all the domains (and hence actionable intents) that the digital assistant is capable of understanding and acting upon. In some examples, ontology 760 is modified, such as by adding or removing entire domains or nodes, or by modifying relationships between the nodes within the ontology 760. [0194] In some examples, nodes associated with multiple related actionable intents are clustered under a “super domain” in ontology 760. For example, a “travel” super-domain includes a cluster of property nodes and actionable intent nodes related to travel. The actionable intent nodes related to travel includes “airline reservation,” “hotel reservation,” “car rental,” “get directions,” “find points of interest,” and so on. The actionable intent nodes under the same super domain (e.g., the “travel” super domain) have many property nodes in common. For example, the actionable intent nodes for “airline reservation,” “hotel reservation,” “car rental,” “get directions,” and “find points of interest” share one or more of the property nodes “start location,” “destination,” “departure date/time,” “arrival date/time,” and “party size.” [0195] In some examples, each node in ontology 760 is associated with a set of words and/or phrases that are relevant to the property or actionable intent represented by the node. The respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are the so-called “vocabulary” associated with the node. The respective set of words and/or phrases associated with each node are stored in vocabulary index 744 in association with the property or actionable intent represented by the node. For example, returning to FIG. 7B, the vocabulary associated with the node for the property of “restaurant” includes words such as “food,” “drinks,” “cuisine,” “hungry,” “eat,” “pizza,” “fast food,” “meal,” and so on. For another example, the vocabulary associated with the node for the actionable intent of “initiate a phone call” includes words and phrases such as “call,” “phone,” “dial,” “ring,” “call this number,” “make a call to,” and so on. The vocabulary index 744 optionally includes words and phrases in different languages. [0196] Natural language processing module 732 receives the candidate text representations (e.g., text string(s) or token sequence(s)) from STT processing module 730, and for each candidate representation, determines what nodes are implicated by the words in the candidate text representation. In some examples, if a word or phrase in the candidate text representation is found to be associated with one or more nodes in ontology 760 (via vocabulary index 744), the word or phrase “triggers” or “activates” those nodes. Based on the quantity and/or relative importance of the activated nodes, natural language processing module 732 selects one of the actionable intents as the task that the user intended the digital assistant to perform. In some examples, the domain that has the most “triggered” nodes is selected. In some examples, the domain having the highest confidence value (e.g., based on the relative importance of its various triggered nodes) is selected. In some examples, the domain is selected based on a combination of the number and the importance of the triggered nodes. In some examples, additional factors are considered in selecting the node as well, such as whether the digital assistant has previously correctly interpreted a similar request from a user. [0197] User data 748 includes user-specific information, such as user-specific vocabulary, user preferences, user address, user’s default and secondary languages, user’s contact list, and other short-term or long-term information for each user. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 uses the user-specific information to supplement the information contained in the user input to further define the user intent. For example, for a user request “invite my friends to my birthday party,” natural language processing module 732 is able to access user data 748 to determine who the “friends” are and when and where the “birthday party” would be held, rather than requiring the user to provide such information explicitly in his/her request. [0198] It should be recognized that in some examples, natural language processing module 732 is implemented using one or more machine learning mechanisms (e.g., neural networks). In particular, the one or more machine learning mechanisms are configured to receive a candidate text representation and contextual information associated with the candidate text representation. Based on the candidate text representation and the associated contextual information, the one or more machine learning mechanisms are configured to determine intent confidence scores over a set of candidate actionable intents. Natural language processing module 732 can select one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents based on the determined intent confidence scores. In some examples, an ontology (e.g., ontology 760) is also used to select the one or more candidate actionable intents from the set of candidate actionable intents. [0199] Other details of searching an ontology based on a token string are described in U.S. Utility Application Serial No.12/341,743 for “Method and Apparatus for Searching Using An Active Ontology,” filed December 22, 2008, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. [0200] In some examples, once natural language processing module 732 identifies an actionable intent (or domain) based on the user request, natural language processing module 732 generates a structured query to represent the identified actionable intent. In some examples, the structured query includes parameters for one or more nodes within the domain for the actionable intent, and at least some of the parameters are populated with the specific information and requirements specified in the user request. For example, the user says “Make me a dinner reservation at a sushi place at 7.” In this case, natural language processing module 732 is able to correctly identify the actionable intent to be “restaurant reservation” based on the user input. According to the ontology, a structured query for a “restaurant reservation” domain includes parameters such as {Cuisine}, {Time}, {Date}, {Party Size}, and the like. In some examples, based on the speech input and the text derived from the speech input using STT processing module 730, natural language processing module 732 generates a partial structured query for the restaurant reservation domain, where the partial structured query includes the parameters {Cuisine = “Sushi”} and {Time = “7pm”}. However, in this example, the user’s utterance contains insufficient information to complete the structured query associated with the domain. Therefore, other necessary parameters such as {Party Size} and {Date} are not specified in the structured query based on the information currently available. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 populates some parameters of the structured query with received contextual information. For example, in some examples, if the user requested a sushi restaurant “near me,” natural language processing module 732 populates a {location} parameter in the structured query with GPS coordinates from the user device. [0201] In some examples, natural language processing module 732 identifies multiple candidate actionable intents for each candidate text representation received from STT processing module 730. Further, in some examples, a respective structured query (partial or complete) is generated for each identified candidate actionable intent. Natural language processing module 732 determines an intent confidence score for each candidate actionable intent and ranks the candidate actionable intents based on the intent confidence scores. In some examples, natural language processing module 732 passes the generated structured query (or queries), including any completed parameters, to task flow processing module 736 (“task flow processor”). In some examples, the structured query (or queries) for the m-best (e.g., m highest ranked) candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736, where m is a predetermined integer greater than zero. In some examples, the structured query (or queries) for the m-best candidate actionable intents are provided to task flow processing module 736 with the corresponding candidate text representation(s). [0202] Other details of inferring a user intent based on multiple candidate actionable intents determined from multiple candidate text representations of a speech input are described in U.S. Utility Application Serial No. 14/298,725 for “System and Method for Inferring User Intent From Speech Inputs,” filed June 6, 2014, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. [0203] Task flow processing module 736 is configured to receive the structured query (or queries) from natural language processing module 732, complete the structured query, if necessary, and perform the actions required to “complete” the user’s ultimate request. In some examples, the various procedures necessary to complete these tasks are provided in task flow models 754. In some examples, task flow models 754 include procedures for obtaining additional information from the user and task flows for performing actions associated with the actionable intent. [0204] As described above, in order to complete a structured query, task flow processing module 736 needs to initiate additional dialogue with the user in order to obtain additional information, and/or disambiguate potentially ambiguous utterances. When such interactions are necessary, task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to engage in a dialogue with the user. In some examples, dialogue flow processing module 734 determines how (and/or when) to ask the user for the additional information and receives and processes the user responses. The questions are provided to and answers are received from the users through I/O processing module 728. In some examples, dialogue flow processing module 734 presents dialogue output to the user via audio and/or visual output, and receives input from the user via spoken or physical (e.g., clicking) responses. Continuing with the example above, when task flow processing module 736 invokes dialogue flow processing module 734 to determine the “party size” and “date” information for the structured query associated with the domain “restaurant reservation,” dialogue flow processing module 734 generates questions such as “For how many people?” and “On which day?” to pass to the user. Once answers are received from the user, dialogue flow processing module 734 then populates the structured query with the missing information, or pass the information to task flow processing module 736 to complete the missing information from the structured query. [0205] Once task flow processing module 736 has completed the structured query for an actionable intent, task flow processing module 736 proceeds to perform the ultimate task associated with the actionable intent. Accordingly, task flow processing module 736 executes the steps and instructions in the task flow model according to the specific parameters contained in the structured query. For example, the task flow model for the actionable intent of “restaurant reservation” includes steps and instructions for contacting a restaurant and actually requesting a reservation for a particular party size at a particular time. For example, using a structured query such as: {restaurant reservation, restaurant = ABC Café, date = 3/12/2012, time = 7pm, party size = 5}, task flow processing module 736 performs the steps of: (1) logging onto a server of the ABC Café or a restaurant reservation system such as OPENTABLE®, (2) entering the date, time, and party size information in a form on the website, (3) submitting the form, and (4) making a calendar entry for the reservation in the user’s calendar. [0206] In some examples, task flow processing module 736 employs the assistance of service processing module 738 (“service processing module”) to complete a task requested in the user input or to provide an informational answer requested in the user input. For example, service processing module 738 acts on behalf of task flow processing module 736 to make a phone call, set a calendar entry, invoke a map search, invoke or interact with other user applications installed on the user device, and invoke or interact with third-party services (e.g., a restaurant reservation portal, a social networking website, a banking portal, etc.). In some examples, the protocols and application programming interfaces (API) required by each service are specified by a respective service model among service models 756. Service processing module 738 accesses the appropriate service model for a service and generates requests for the service in accordance with the protocols and APIs required by the service according to the service model. [0207] For example, if a restaurant has enabled an online reservation service, the restaurant submits a service model specifying the necessary parameters for making a reservation and the APIs for communicating the values of the necessary parameter to the online reservation service. When requested by task flow processing module 736, service processing module 738 establishes a network connection with the online reservation service using the web address stored in the service model, and sends the necessary parameters of the reservation (e.g., time, date, party size) to the online reservation interface in a format according to the API of the online reservation service. [0208] In some examples, natural language processing module 732, dialogue flow processing module 734, and task flow processing module 736 are used collectively and iteratively to infer and define the user’s intent, obtain information to further clarify and refine the user intent, and finally generate a response (i.e., an output to the user, or the completion of a task) to fulfill the user’s intent. The generated response is a dialogue response to the speech input that at least partially fulfills the user’s intent. Further, in some examples, the generated response is output as a speech output. In these examples, the generated response is sent to speech synthesis processing module 740 (e.g., speech synthesizer) where it can be processed to synthesize the dialogue response in speech form. In yet other examples, the generated response is data content relevant to satisfying a user request in the speech input. [0209] In examples where task flow processing module 736 receives multiple structured queries from natural language processing module 732, task flow processing module 736 initially processes the first structured query of the received structured queries to attempt to complete the first structured query and/or execute one or more tasks or actions represented by the first structured query. In some examples, the first structured query corresponds to the highest ranked actionable intent. In other examples, the first structured query is selected from the received structured queries based on a combination of the corresponding speech recognition confidence scores and the corresponding intent confidence scores. In some examples, if task flow processing module 736 encounters an error during processing of the first structured query (e.g., due to an inability to determine a necessary parameter), the task flow processing module 736 can proceed to select and process a second structured query of the received structured queries that corresponds to a lower ranked actionable intent. The second structured query is selected, for example, based on the speech recognition confidence score of the corresponding candidate text representation, the intent confidence score of the corresponding candidate actionable intent, a missing necessary parameter in the first structured query, or any combination thereof. [0210] Speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to synthesize speech outputs for presentation to the user. Speech synthesis processing module 740 synthesizes speech outputs based on text provided by the digital assistant. For example, the generated dialogue response is in the form of a text string. Speech synthesis processing module 740 converts the text string to an audible speech output. Speech synthesis processing module 740 uses any appropriate speech synthesis technique in order to generate speech outputs from text, including, but not limited, to concatenative synthesis, unit selection synthesis, diphone synthesis, domain-specific synthesis, formant synthesis, articulatory synthesis, hidden Markov model (HMM) based synthesis, and sinewave synthesis. In some examples, speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to synthesize individual words based on phonemic strings corresponding to the words. For example, a phonemic string is associated with a word in the generated dialogue response. The phonemic string is stored in metadata associated with the word. Speech synthesis processing module 740 is configured to directly process the phonemic string in the metadata to synthesize the word in speech form. [0211] In some examples, instead of (or in addition to) using speech synthesis processing module 740, speech synthesis is performed on a remote device (e.g., the server system 108), and the synthesized speech is sent to the user device for output to the user. For example, this can occur in some implementations where outputs for a digital assistant are generated at a server system. And because server systems generally have more processing power or resources than a user device, it is possible to obtain higher quality speech outputs than would be practical with client-side synthesis. [0212] Additional details on digital assistants can be found in the U.S. Utility Application No. 12/987,982, entitled “Intelligent Automated Assistant,” filed January 10, 2011, and U.S. Utility Application No.13/251,088, entitled “Generating and Processing Task Items That Represent Tasks to Perform,” filed September 30, 2011, the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. 4. Digital Assistant Interactions in a Communication Session [0213] FIGS.8A-8H illustrate systems and techniques for digital assistant (DA) interactions in a communication session, according to various examples. [0214] FIG.8A illustrates a block diagram of device 800 and external device 900. As discussed below, each of devices 800 and 900 is configured to handle DA interactions in a communication session [0215] Device 800 is implemented, for example, as device 200, 400, or 600. Similarly, external device 900 is implemented, for example, as another instance of device 200, 400, or 600. While FIGS. 8B-8H below show device 800 and external device 900 each implemented as a smartphone device, device 800 and 900 may be each implemented as another type of device, such as a smart watch, a smart speaker, a smart home appliance, a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet device, a head-mounted device, and the like. [0216] Device 800 implements, in memory 802 (e.g., as computer-executable instructions), first DA 804, audio control module 806, and display control module 808. First DA 804 is configured to provide DA services to device 800, as discussed with respect to FIGS.7A-7C. In some examples, first DA 804 at least partially includes the components of DA module 726, discussed with respect to FIGS. 7A-7B above. [0217] Audio control module 806 is configured to manage the audio experience of device 800 when device 800 is engaged in a communication session. For example, in conjunction with other components of device 800 configured to provide audio communications (e.g., communication module 228, RF circuitry 208, audio circuity 210, speaker 211, peripherals interface 218), audio control module 806 is configured to cause device 800 to transmit audio outputs generated by first DA 804 to other device(s) in the communication session and/or cause device 800 to output received audio generated by other DA(s) respectively operating on the other device(s). [0218] Display control module 808 is configured to manage the displayed experience of device 800 when device 800 is engaged in a communication session. For example, in conjunction with other components of device 800 (e.g., communication module 228, RF circuitry 208, display controller 256, touch sensitive display system 212, peripherals interface 218), display control module 808 is configured to cause device 800 to display DA information (e.g., displayed outputs generated by first DA 804 and displayed indications of first DA 804’s state) and information about the participants in the communication session (e.g., information identifying the participants in the communication session), cause device 800 to transmit, to the other device(s), instructions to display DA information, cause device 800 to receive instructions from the other device(s) to display DA information, and/or cause device 800 to display DA information based on received instructions. [0219] Similarly, external device 900 implements, in memory 902, second DA 904, audio control module 906, and display control module 908. Second DA 904, audio control module 906, and display control module 908 are each similar or substantially identical to first DA 804, audio control module 806, and display control module 808, respectively. For example, second DA 904 at least partially includes the components of DA module 726. Audio control module 906 is configured to manage the audio experience of external device 900 when external device 900 is engaged in a communication session, e.g., as described with respect to audio control module 806. Display control module 908 is configured to manage the displayed experience of external device 900 when external device 900 is engaged in a communication session, e.g., as described with respect to display control module 808. [0220] While the description herein describes separate DAs involved in a communication session, in some examples, the present disclosure provides each participant in the communication session with a user experience consistent with a single DA being involved in the communication session. For example, even though first DA 804 and second DA 904 may each generate respective responses in a communication session, first DA 804 and second DA 904 can provide the responses using the same voice characteristics. Further, each device in the communication session may display only a single DA representation (e.g., DA indicator 812 discussed below) and the display manner of the DA representation (e.g., indicating whether a DA is speaking) may be synchronized across the devices. Accordingly, it may appear that a single DA processes a user request and generates/provides a response to the user request. In other examples, the present disclosure provides each participant in a communication session with a user experience consistent with multiple DAs being involved in the communication session. For example, the respective responses generated by DAs 804 and 904 may have different voice characteristics and/or each device may indicate which DA provides each response. [0221] FIG.8B illustrates device 800 engaged in a communication session with external device 900. Although FIGS.8B-8H below show device 800 engaged in a communication session with a single external device 900, in other examples, device 800 is engaged in a communication session with multiple external devices. It will be appreciated that the techniques discussed below apply when device 800 is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices (e.g., each implemented as a separate instance of external device 900). [0222] A communication session is provided by multiple electronic devices and allows the participants in the session to share communications, e.g., textual, audio, and/or video communications. For example, the communication session corresponds to an audio communication session (e.g., a phone call), a video communication session (e.g., a video conference), a textual communication session (e.g., a group text message session), and/or a virtual or mixed reality communication session. For example, in a virtual or mixed reality communication session, the respective devices of the participants each provide an audiovisual experience to simulate each participant (or their respective avatar) being concurrently present in a shared location. For example, a virtual or mixed reality communication session can simulate each participant being present in a physical or virtual room of a house. In some examples, a communication session includes different types of communication experiences (e.g., audio, video, textual, virtual or mixed reality) provided by the respective devices of the participants. For example, in a communication session, a first device may provide a virtual or mixed reality communication experience (e.g., by displaying virtual representation(s) of other participant(s) in a virtual setting) while a second device may provide a video communication experience (e.g., by displaying video of the other participant(s)). Accordingly, a communication session may be provided by multiple devices having different capabilities, e.g., by a device having virtual reality capability and a device having limited or no virtual reality capability, by a device having video capability and a device having no video capability. [0223] In FIG. 8B, device 800 displays representation 810 indicating that the user of external device 900 (e.g., Rae) participates in the communication session. Similarly, external device 900 displays representation 910 indicating that the user of device 800 (e.g., Tim) participates in the communication session. While FIG. 8B shows that representations 810 and 910 each indicate the name of a respective user, in other examples, representations 810 and 910 each include live video of the respective user and/or each include a respective physical representation (e.g., an avatar) of the respective user. [0224] While device 800 is engaged in the communication session with external device 900, device 800 receives, from Tim, input to invoke first DA 804. In some examples, some types of inputs invoke a DA while other types of inputs, as discussed below, indicate whether a natural language input is intended for a DA without invoking the DA. In some examples, input to invoke a DA includes spoken trigger input, such as speech input including a predetermined word or phrase for invoking the DA, e.g., “Hey Siri,” “Siri,” “Assistant,” “Wake up,” and the like. In some examples, input to invoke a DA includes a selection of a button of the corresponding device (e.g., device 800), such as a selection of a physical button of the device or selection of an affordance displayed by the device. In some examples, input to invoke a DA includes detected user gaze input, e.g., input indicating that user gaze is directed to a particular displayed affordance for a predetermined duration. In some examples, a device determines that user gaze input is input to invoke a DA based on the timing of the natural language input relative to the user gaze input. For example, a device determines that user gaze input is to invoke a DA if user gaze is directed to the affordance at a start time of the natural language input and/or at an end time of the natural language input. In some examples, a device interprets user gaze input as input to invoke a DA when the communication session does not include any currently invoked DA. When the communication session includes a currently invoked DA (e.g., a DA has been invoked on any device in the communication session without being dismissed), the device interprets user gaze input to indicate that a natural language input is intended for a DA, but does not interpret the user gaze input as input to invoke the DA. [0225] In FIG. 8B, Tim provides the spoken trigger input “Hey Siri” to device 800. In some examples, device 800 transmits the spoken trigger input to external device 900 and external device 900 outputs the spoken trigger input. [0226] In some examples, in response to receiving the input to invoke first DA 804, device 800 invokes first DA 804. For example, device 800 displays DA indicator 812 to indicate the invoked DA and begins to execute certain processes and/or threads corresponding to first DA 804. In some examples, invoking first DA 804 in the communication session includes device 800 causing external device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) to display DA indicator 812. For example, using display control module 808, device 800 causes external device 900 to display DA indicator 812 concurrently with device 800. [0227] In some examples, device 800 synchronizes (e.g., using display control module 808) the display state of DA indicator 812 across each device in the communication session. Thus, each device in the communication session concurrently displays DA indicator 812 in the same state. For example, device 800 displays DA indicator 812 in different states, corresponding to respective different visualizations, to indicate different states of first DA 804. For example, a first display state of DA indicator 812 indicates that first DA 804 is ready to accept (e.g., listening for) natural language input, a second display state indicates that first DA 804 is currently receiving natural language input, a third display state indicates that first DA 804 is currently processing natural language input, and a fourth display state indicates that first DA 804 is currently responding to natural language input. [0228] While device 800 is engaged in a communication session with external device 900, device 800 receives, from Tim, a natural language input corresponding to a task. For example, in FIG. 8B, after Tim provides the spoken trigger input “Hey Siri,” Tim provides the speech input “send a message saying ‘hello’” intended to cause first DA 804 to send the message. In some examples, device 800 transmits the natural language input to external device 900 (and to any other external device(s) in the communication session) and the external device(s) each output the natural language input. For example, external device 900 outputs “send a message saying ‘hello,’” thereby informing Rae that Tim intends to send a message using first DA 804. [0229] In some examples, in accordance with invoking first DA 804, first DA 804 generates a prompt for further user input about the task. For example, first DA 804 processes the natural language input (e.g., as described with respect to FIGS. 7A-7C) to generate the prompt. In the example of FIG. 8B, responsive to the natural language input “send a message saying ‘hello,’” first DA 804 generates the prompt “who would you like to send the message to?”. In some examples, device 800 outputs the prompt and transmits the prompt to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session), e.g., using audio control module 806. Upon receiving the transmitted prompt, external device 900 outputs “who would you like to send the message to?” to inform Rae of first DA 804’s generated prompt. [0230] First DA 804 can allow any participant in the communication session to respond to the prompt. Operating first DA 804 in such manner may thus improve the flexibility and efficiency with which DAs can satisfy requested tasks. For example, by not limiting the response to the prompt to a particular participant, the participant having the correct and/or optimal response to the prompt may provide the response. Operating DAs in such manner may also provide more intuitive DA participation in communication sessions, e.g., as in a communication session between human participants, any participant may respond to a question or prompt from another participant. [0231] Turning to FIG.8C, after transmitting the prompt for further user input, device 800 receives, from external device 900, a response to the prompt. In some examples, the response is received at external device 900 without external device 900 receiving, after outputting the prompt, input to invoke second DA 904. In FIG.8C, Rae responds to the prompt “who would you like to send the message to?” by speaking “Qingwei.” External device 900 receives the response “Qingwei” and transmits the response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). In some examples, device 800 outputs the received response to the prompt. [0232] Upon receiving the response to the prompt, first DA 804 initiates the task based on the response and information stored on device 800 and corresponding to device 800’s user. The stored information includes, for example, information about Tim’s contacts (e.g., identities, phone numbers, and email addresses of contacts stored on Tim’s device), calendar information, videos, photos, notes, documents, text and email messages, health information, financial information, home appliance information (e.g., on or off, locked or unlocked, temperature setting, and the like), applications installed on device 800, settings of device 800, and the like. In some examples, first DA 804 initiates the task by processing the response using the user’s information as described with respect to FIGS. 7A-7C. In FIG. 8C, for instance, first DA 804 initiates the task of sending a message to Qingwei saying “hello,” where Qingwei is Tim’s (not Rae’s) contact. [0233] In some examples, first DA 804 generates an output indicative of the initiated task and device 800 transmits the output to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). In some examples, the output indicates the user whose information was used to initiate the task. For example, first DA 804 generates the output “your message to Tim’s contact Qingwei says ‘hello’, ready to send?”, where “Tim’s contact Qinqwei” indicates a use of Tim’s contact information to initiate the task. Upon receiving the output, external device 900 provides the output. As another example, consistent with the techniques discussed above, if Tim requests first DA 804 to “create a new note,” first DA 804 generates the prompt “what do you want your note to say?”, and Rae responds “grocery list,” first DA 804 generates the output “ok Tim’s note says ‘grocery list.” [0234] Accordingly, first DA 804 can use the information of the user who most recently invoked the DA (e.g., the current invoker Tim) to initiate the task, despite another user (e.g., Rae) responding to first DA 804’s prompt for further input. Operating first DA 804 in such manner may provide a more consistent and efficient user-DA experience by avoiding confusion about whose information first DA 804 uses to initiates tasks. Operating first DA 804 in such manner may further provide improved user feedback by indicating whose information is used to initiate the task, thereby confirming that first DA 804 initiated the correct task (using the correct user’s information) or allowing users to correct the task (if initiated using the incorrect user’s information), which additionally, improves the accuracy and efficiency of user DA interaction. [0235] In some examples, initiating the task includes displaying, on device 800, affordance 814 corresponding to the task. In some examples, first DA 804 generates affordance 814 based on the information corresponding to the user of device 800. For example, in FIG. 8C, initiating the task of sending a message to Qingwei saying “hello” includes displaying affordance 814 indicating that a composed message to Qingwei is ready to send. [0236] In some examples, device 800 synchronizes the display of affordances corresponding to initiated tasks across each device in the communication session. For example, device 800 further causes (e.g., using display control module 808) external device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) to each display affordance 814, e.g., each concurrently display affordance 814 with device 800. [0237] Turning to FIG.8D, in some examples, device 800 also synchronizes any modifications to displayed affordances across each device in the communication session. For example, device 800 receives a user input corresponding to a selection of affordance 814, and in response, displays affordance 814 in a modified state. In FIG. 8D, Tim selects affordance 814 and modifies the message to read “are you coming to the watch party?”. Accordingly, in some examples, the modified state corresponds to a modified textual content of affordance 814. In other examples, the modified state corresponds to a modified display manner (e.g., size, shape, color, brightness, animation) of affordance 814. Responsive to modifying the state of affordance 814, device 800 (e.g., using display control module 808) causes the external device(s) to each display (e.g., concurrently with device 800) affordance 814 in the modified state. For example, in FIG. 8D, external device 900 also displays modified affordance 814 indicating the updated message “are you coming to the watch party?”. [0238] In some examples, modifications to affordance 814 made by respective user(s) of external device(s) in the communication session are also synchronized across each device in the communication session. For example, at external device 900, Rae provides input corresponding to a selection of affordance 814, e.g., input to enlarge affordance 814. In response to receiving the input, external device 900 displays affordance 814 in a second modified state, e.g., an enlarged state. In response to receiving the input, external device 900 further transmits, to device 800, an instruction to display affordance 814 in the second modified state, e.g., using display control module 908. In response to receiving the instruction, device 800 displays affordance 814 in the second modified state. Accordingly, responsive to Rae enlarging affordance 814 at external device 900, each device in the communication session concurrently displays enlarged affordance 814. [0239] In some examples, respective DAs operating on the devices of the participants in the communication session are configured to operate in different languages. For example, the speech recognition and natural language processing capabilities of the respective DAs (e.g., provided by STT processing module 730, phonetic alphabet conversion module 731, vocabulary 744, and natural language processing module 732) are configured to operate in respective different languages. For example first DA 804 operating on device 800 in configured to operate in a first language (e.g., English) while second DA 904 operating on external device 900 is configured to operate in a different second language (e.g., Chinese). [0240] In some examples, first DA 804 determines whether it can interpret, in its respective language, a natural language input (e.g., a response to a prompt for further user input). In some examples, first DA 804 determines whether it can interpret the natural language input based on a STT confidence score corresponding to the natural language input (e.g., determined by STT processing module 730), an intent confidence score corresponding to the natural language input (e.g., determined by natural language processing module 732), and/or whether first DA 804 can successfully initiate a task based on the natural language input (e.g., using task flow processing module 736). For example, first DA 804 determines that it can interpret the natural language input if the STT confidence score is above a threshold, if the intent confidence score is above a threshold, and/or if first DA 804 can successfully initiate the task. [0241] In the example of FIG. 8B, the natural language input “send a message saying ‘hello’” is in a first language (English) and first DA 804 is configured to operate in the first language. Accordingly, first DA 804 can interpret the natural language input in the first language. However, in FIG. 8C, suppose that the response to the prompt “who do you want to send your message to” is in a second language (e.g., Chinese) different from the first language. For example, because second DA 904 is configured to operate in Chinese, Rae is accustomed to interacting with DAs in Chinese. Accordingly, Rae provides the Chinese response “ indicating a request to send the message to a contact named
Figure imgf000076_0005
“ ”
Figure imgf000076_0004
First DA 804 determines whether it can interpret, in the first language, the response. In the present example, first DA 804 determines that it cannot interpret, in the first language, the response (e.g., as a STT confidence score and/or intent confidence score corresponding to the response is below a respective threshold and/or first DA 804 cannot initiate a task based on the response). In accordance with a determination that first DA 804 cannot interpret, in the first language, the response, first DA 804 generates an output indicative of an error. For example, first DA 804 generates the output “sorry, I couldn’t find a contact named Song How Young” where “Song How Young” is first DA 804’s attempted English transcription of the Chinese response
Figure imgf000076_0002
Device 800 further transmits, to the external device(s) in the communication session, the output indicative of the error. Accordingly, when Rae responds to the prompt with
Figure imgf000076_0003
external device 900 outputs “sorry, I couldn’t find a contact named Song How Young.” In this manner, first DA 804 may advantageously indicate (e.g., via an English response) the correct language in which to interact with first DA 804, thereby facilitating efficient and accurate task initiation. [0242] Turning to FIGS.8E-8F, in some examples, a user of an external device in the communication session (different from device 800) invokes a DA. The invoked DA uses information corresponding to the user stored on the external device to initiate a requested task. In FIG.8E, after device 800 transmits (and external device 900 outputs) the output “your message to Tim’s contact Qingwei says ‘hello’, ready to send?”, external device 900 receives, from Rae, input to invoke second DA 904. For example, Rae provides the spoken trigger input Receiving the input to invoke second DA 904 transfers the DA invocation from device 800 in FIG.8D to external device 900 in FIG. 8E, meaning Rae is now the current (e.g., most recent) invoker. When invoked on external device 900, second DA 904 initiates tasks based on information corresponding to Rae, e.g., until second DA 904 dismisses (e.g., DA indicator 812 ceases to be displayed and/or certain processes/threads corresponding to second DA 904 cease executing on external device 900) or until another device receives user input to invoke the DA on the other device. [0243] In FIG. 8E, external device 900 also receives, from Rae, a second natural language input corresponding to a second task. For example, Rae speaks
Figure imgf000076_0001
” (“let’s watch Harry Potter together”) in Chinese. In FIG. 8E, external device 900 transmits the second natural language input to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). Upon receiving the second natural language input, device 800 outputs the second natural language input. [0244] In accordance with receiving the input to invoke second DA 904, second DA 904 generates a second prompt for user input about the second task, e.g.,
Figure imgf000077_0001
(“which Harry Potter movie?”). External device 900 transmits the second prompt to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). Upon receiving the second prompt, device 800 outputs the second prompt. [0245] In FIG. 8F, Tim provides a response to the second prompt. For example, device 800 receives, from Tim, the response (“Harry Potter and the
Figure imgf000077_0002
Philosopher’s Stone”). In some examples, device 800 receives the response without Tim providing input to invoke first DA 804 after device 800 receives the second prompt. Device 800 transmits the response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). Upon receiving the response, second DA 904 initiates the second task based on the response and information corresponding to Rae stored on external device 900. For example, second DA 904 initiates the task of watching “Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone,” where the movie is stored on external device 900 or associated with Rae’s media subscription account. Second DA 904 further generates an output indicative of the initiated second task, e.g., (“starting watch together”). External device
Figure imgf000077_0003
900 transmits the output to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). Upon receiving the output, device 800 provides the output. [0246] The above described examples of FIGS. 8B-8F allow a user different from the current DA invoker to respond to a DA’s prompt for user input. But sometimes, it may be desirable to enable only the current invoker to successfully respond to a DA’s prompt for further user input about a requested task. Particularly, for certain predetermined types of tasks, it may be undesirable for other user(s) to instruct the current invoker’s DA to initiate a task using the current invoker’s data. Examples of such predetermined types of tasks include secure tasks such as payment tasks (e.g., as it may be undesirable for other users to authorize payments for the current invoker) and home appliance control tasks (e.g., as it may be undesirable for other users to control the current invoker’s home appliances (e.g., unlock a door)). Accordingly, FIGS. 8G-8H below illustrate techniques for handling DA requests for such predetermined types of tasks in a communication session. [0247] In FIG. 8G, while device 800 is engaged in a communication session with external device 900 and while first DA 804 is invoked on device 800 (and monitoring for natural language inputs), device 800 receives a natural language input corresponding to a task. For example, the current invoker Tim provides the natural language input “pay Larry $100.” Device 800 transmits the natural language input to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). External device 900 outputs the received natural language input. First DA 804 further generates a prompt for further user input about the task, e.g., “ok, I’ll pay Larry $100, confirm?”. Device 800 outputs the prompt and transmits the prompt to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0248] In some examples, first DA 804 determines whether the task corresponds to a predetermined type of task. For example, first DA 804 determines whether the natural language input corresponds to a predetermined type of domain. Example predetermined types of domains include a payments domain (e.g., associated with actionable intents of making payments and/or accessing payment information) and a home control domain (e.g., associated with actionable intents of controlling the state and/or settings of a user’s home appliances). In the present example, first DA 804 determines that the task of paying Larry $100 corresponds to a predetermined type of task. [0249] Turning to FIG.8H, Rae provides a response to the prompt at external device 900, e.g., “Yes.” Device 800 receives and outputs the prompt. However, in accordance with first DA 804 determining that the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task and in accordance with receiving the response from external device 900, first DA 804 generates an output indicating that it is unable to complete the task. For example, because first DA 804 determines that the task corresponds to the predetermined type and determines the response is received from an external device, first DA 804 generates “sorry, I can’t do that. Tim, do you confirm?”. In some examples, the output indicating that first DA 804 is unable to complete the task indicates the authorized user (e.g., Tim) for causing first DA 804 to complete the task. Device 800 provides the output and transmits the output to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0250] Continuing with the present example, device 800 receives, from Tim, a response to the prompt for further input (e.g., “Yes”). Device 800 further transmits the response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). In accordance with a determination that the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task and in accordance with a determination that the response is received from the current invoker (e.g., Tim), first DA 804 initiates the task based on information corresponding to Tim. For example, because the task is of the predetermined type and the current invoker confirms the task, first DA 804 initiates the task of paying Larry $100, where Larry is one of Tim’s contacts. First DA 804 further generates an output indicative of the initiated task, e.g., “ok I paid Larry $100.” Device 800 provides the output and transmits the output to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). In this manner, device security may be improved by allowing only authorized users (e.g., the current invoker) to authorize completion of secure tasks. [0251] In some examples, displayed responses (e.g., affordances) generated by DAs are not synchronized across external device(s) in the communication session if the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task. Accordingly, in some examples, causing the external device(s) to each display affordance 814 in FIGS. 8C-8D is performed in accordance with a determination that the task (e.g., sending a message) does not correspond to the predetermined type of task. In FIGS. 8G-8H, responsive to receiving the natural language input “pay Larry $100,” first DA 804 generates affordance 816 corresponding to the payment task. Notably, affordance 816 is displayed on device 800 without device 800 causing (e.g., using display control module 808) the external device(s) to each display affordance 816. For example, in accordance with first DA 804 determining that the task corresponds to the predetermined type, display control module 808 does not instruct the other external device(s) to display generated affordance 816. Further, in some examples, modifications Tim makes to the state of affordance 816 are also not synchronized across the external device(s) in the communication session. [0252] In other examples, displayed responses generated by DAs are synchronized across external device(s) in the communication session even if the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task. For example, if first DA 804 determines that the task corresponds to the predetermined type, first DA 804 causes (e.g., using display control module 808) the external device(s) to each display the affordance in a non-interactive state. In some examples, an affordance displayed in the non-interactive state has a different display manner (e.g., is displayed in grayscale instead of color, has a smaller display size) than the affordance displayed in a normal (e.g., interactive) state. In some examples, when a device displays the affordance in the non-interactive state, the device does not allow user input to select the affordance to cause performance of a corresponding task and/or does not allow user input to modify the content of the affordance. In some examples, when a device displays the affordance in the non-interactive state, the device does not display the content (e.g., text, images) of the affordance. For example, device 800 displays affordance 816 in FIGS. 8G-8H in the interactive state, thereby allowing Tim to select the “confirm” button to pay Larry $100. Device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) can display affordance 816 concurrently with device 800, but each display affordance 816 in the non- interactive state. For example, device 900 displays affordance 816 in grayscale and does not allow Rae to select the “confirm” button to pay Larry $100. [0253] In some examples, modifications made (e.g., by Tim) to the display of affordance 816 are synchronized across devices in the communication session, but affordance 816 remains displayed in the non-interactive state at the other device(s). For example, if Tim modifies the textual content of affordance 816 (e.g., to pay Larry $50 instead of $100), the other device(s) display affordance 816 to indicate the modified textual content, but still display affordance 816 in grayscale and do not allow the respective user(s) to select the “confirm” button. [0254] FIGS.9A-9F and 10A-10D below illustrate techniques for DA interactions in a communication session when DAs of the participants in the communication session are configured to operate in different languages, according to various examples. Sometimes, participants in a communication session may speak different languages, so each participant may be accustomed to interacting with a DA in a particular language. However, an invoked DA in the communication session may be configured to operate in a single language (e.g., the language of the current invoker) different from the language another participant customarily uses to interact with DAs. Thus, it may be desirable to define the correct language for interacting with DAs in a communication session. [0255] In FIG. 9A, while device 800 is engaged in a communication session with external device 900 (and optionally other external device(s)), device 800 receives input to invoke first DA 804. For example, Tim provides the spoken trigger input “Hey Siri.” In the examples of FIGS.9A-9F and 10A-10D, first DA 804 is configured to operate in a first language (e.g., English) and second DA 904 is configured to operate in a second language (e.g., Spanish). Further in FIGS. 9A-9E below, Tim is the current (most recent) DA invoker, meaning external device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) have not received, during the communication session, input to invoke their respective DAs. [0256] Device 800 receives a first natural language input in the first language. For example, Tim says “what time is it?” to request first DA 804 to provide a current time. Device 800 transmits the first natural language input to external device 900 (and to any other external device(s) in the communication session) and the external device(s) each output the first natural language input. [0257] In accordance with invoking first DA 804, first DA 804 generates a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input. Device 800 outputs the first response, transmits the first response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session), and the device(s) each output the first response. For example, in FIG. 9A, first DA 804 generates the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” [0258] Turning to FIG.9B, in some examples, if a participant intends to continue interacting with a DA in the communication session, they issue a second natural language input (a follow up request) in the language in which their own DA is configured to operate. For example, after device 800 transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” and external device 900 outputs the first response, external device 900 receives the follow up request in the second language. For example, in FIG. 9B, Rae asks second DA 904, “¿y en Paris?” in Spanish. Device 800 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) receive the follow up request from external device 900. In some examples, device 800 further outputs the follow up request. [0259] In some examples, the follow up request is received without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after receiving the first response. For example, Rae speaks “¿y en Paris?” without providing a spoken trigger input (e.g., “Hola Siri”) and without pressing a button of external device 900. In some examples, the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt (e.g., textual or audio prompt generated by first DA 804 or second DA 904) for user input (e.g., about a previously requested task). Accordingly, the follow up request may be an unprompted request to second DA 904, unlike the prompted responses described with respect to FIGS.8B-8H. [0260] After device 800 outputs the first response (e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino”), each DA in the communication session monitors for the follow up request, e.g., for a predetermined duration after the first response is output In some examples monitoring for the follow up request at a device includes determining that the follow up request is intended for the DA operating on the device. Accordingly, the DAs in the communication session may distinguish between natural language input intended as conversation between the participants (not intended for a DA) and follow up requests intended for a DA. [0261] In some examples, determining that a follow up request is intended for a DA includes determining that the DA receives the follow up request, from the DA’s user, within a predetermined duration (e.g., 5 seconds, 10 seconds) after the first response is output. Thus, a DA determines that any natural language input received directly from the DA’s user (and not transmitted from another device), and received within the predetermined duration, is intended for itself. For example, second DA 904 determines that the follow up request “¿y en Paris?” is intended for itself because second DA 904 receives the follow up request from Rae within a predetermined duration after external device 900 outputs “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” Although device 800 also receives the follow up request, first DA 804 determines the follow up request is not intended for itself because the follow up request was received from external device 900, not from Tim. [0262] In some examples, determining that a follow up request is intended for a DA is based on a gaze direction of the DA’s user. For example, each device detects user gaze data (e.g., via device camera(s)) and analyzes the gaze data to determine whether a follow up request, received from the device’s user, is intended for the respective DA. In some examples, each device detects user gaze data within a predetermined duration after the first response is output. In some examples, a device determines that a follow up request is intended for the respective DA if user gaze is directed to a displayed gaze target (e.g., at DA indicator 812 for a predetermined period) within a predetermined duration before a start time of the follow up request, if user gaze is directed to the gaze target at the start time, and/or if user gaze is directed to the gaze target at an end time of the follow up request. For example, second DA 904 determines that the follow up request “¿y en Paris?” is intended for itself based on gaze data detected by external device 900. Although device 800 also receives the follow up request “¿y en Paris?”, device 800 determines the follow up request is not intended for first DA 804 because the follow up request is received from external device 900 (not Tim) and/or because gaze data detected by device 800 does not indicate that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804. [0263] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that a follow up request is intended for a DA, the DA generates a second response, in its respective language, to the follow up request. In some examples, the DA generates the second response based on information corresponding to a user of the respective device (e.g., the user’s contact information, calendar information, videos, photos, notes, and the like), where the information is stored on the respective device. In some examples, second DA 904 generates the second response without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after external device 900 outputs the first response, e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” In FIG. 9B, because second DA 904 determines that the follow up request “¿y en Paris?” is intended for itself, second DA 904 generates the Spanish second response “en Paris, son las 6pm.” External device 900 further transmits the second response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). In some examples, upon receiving the second response, device 800 outputs the second response. [0264] In some examples, device 800 transmits, to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session), context information associated with the first natural language input. In some examples, the context information includes a transcription of the communication session determined by STT processing module 730, e.g., a transcription of the participants’ conversation and DA generated responses. In some examples, the context information includes the contextual information discussed with respect to FIG.7B above, e.g., information collected by sensors of device 800. In some examples, the context information indicates a conversational context associated with the first natural language input, e.g., a determined domain corresponding to the first natural language input. For example, first DA 804 determines that the first natural language input “what time is it?” corresponds to a time domain (e.g., associated with actionable intents of providing time data) and causes device 800 to transmit context information indicating the time domain to external device 900. In some examples, second DA 904 (or another DA responding to the follow up request) generates the second response to the follow up request based on the received context information. For example, using the context information, second DA 904 interprets the follow up request “¿y en Paris?” to mean asking about the time in Paris to generate the second response “en Paris, son las 6pm.” [0265] In some examples, when a DA in a communication session generates a response based on context information, the response indicates the context information used. Operating DAs in such manner can avoid confusing participants in the communication session about what the response refers to. Thus, in some examples, in accordance with a determination that a DA uses context information to interpret natural language input and a determination that the respective device is engaged in a communication session, the DA generates a response indicating the context information. For example, the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” in FIG. 9A indicates the context information of Cupertino, California (e.g., Tim’s current location) used by first DA 804 to respond to “what time is it?” [0266] FIG.9C illustrates an example where Tim provides a follow up request in the first language of first DA 804. In FIG. 9C, continuing from FIG. 9A, after device 800 outputs and transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino,” device 800 receives, from Tim, the follow up request “what about in Paris?”. The follow up request is received without device 800 receiving, after outputting and/or transmitting the first response, input to invoke first DA 804. In some examples, the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for further user input (e.g., about a previously requested task). [0267] In FIG. 9C, first DA 804 determines that the follow up request “what about in Paris?” is intended for itself, e.g., as Tim speaks the follow up request within a predetermined duration after device 800 outputs “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” In accordance with receiving the follow up request (and optionally in accordance with a determination that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804), first DA 804 generates a second response, in the first language, to the follow up request. The second response indicates an initiated task (e.g., retrieving the current time in Paris) corresponding to the follow up request. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving input to invoke first DA 804 after device 800 outputs the first response, e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” For example, first DA 804 generates the second response “it’s 6pm in Paris” and device 800 transmits the second response to external device 900 (and to any other external device(s) in the communication session). [0268] FIG.9D illustrates an example where Tim attempts to provide a follow up request in a language different from the language of first DA 804. In FIG. 9D, continuing from FIG. 9A, after device 800 outputs and transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino,” device 800 receives, from Tim, the follow up request in a language different from the first language. For example, Tim speaks “¿y en Paris?” in Spanish. The follow up request is received without device 800 receiving, after outputting and/or transmitting the first response, input to invoke first DA 804. In some examples, the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for further user input (e.g., about a previously requested task). [0269] In FIG. 9D, first DA 804 determines that the follow up request is intended for itself. In accordance with receiving the follow up request (and optionally in accordance with a determination that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804), first DA 804 generates a second response, in the first language, to the follow up request. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving input to invoke first DA 804 after device 800 outputs the first response, e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” In the present example, the second response indicates that first DA 804 is unable to interpret the follow up request. For example, because first DA 804 is configured to operate in English, first DA 804 is unable to interpret the Spanish follow up request “¿y en Paris?” and thus generates the second response “sorry, I don’t understand.” Device 800 transmits the second response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0270] FIG.9E illustrates an example where Rae attempts to provide a follow up request in the language of the current invoker’s DA. In FIG. 9E, continuing from FIG.9A, after device 800 transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” to external device 900, and after external device 900 outputs the first response, external device 900 receives the follow up request in the first language. For example, Rae speaks “what about in Paris?” in English. External device 900 transmits the follow up request to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session) and device 800 receives the follow up request. The follow up request is received at external device 900 without external device 900 receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, input to invoke second DA 904. In some examples, the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for further user input. [0271] In FIG. 9E, second DA 904 determines that the follow up request is intended for itself. In accordance with receiving the follow up request (and optionally in accordance with a determination that the follow up request is intended for second DA 904), second DA 904 generates, in the second language, a second response to the follow up request. The second response indicates that second DA 904 is unable to interpret the follow up request. In some examples, second DA 904 generates the second response without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after external device 900 outputs the first response, e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” For example, because second DA 904 is configured to operate in Spanish, second DA 904 is unable to interpret the English follow up request “what about in Paris?”. Second DA 904 thus generates the second response “no entiendo.” External device 900 transmits the second response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session) and device 800 receives the response. [0272] FIG.9F illustrates an example where Rae successfully interacts with second DA 904 in the second language by providing input to invoke second DA 904. In FIG.9F, continuing from FIG.9A, after device 800 transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” to external device 900, and after external device 900 outputs the first response, external device 900 receives, from Rae, a natural language input in the second language. For example, Rae speaks “¿y en Paris?”. External device 900 transmits the natural language input to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). Device 800 receives and outputs the natural language input. [0273] External device 900 further receives, from Rae, input to invoke second DA 904. For example, Rae speaks “¿y en Paris?” after providing the spoken trigger input “Hola Siri” or after second DA 904 invokes responsive to a press of a button on external device 900. Accordingly, by providing input to invoke second DA 904, the DA invocation transfers from device 800 in FIG. 9A to external device 900 in FIG. 9F, meaning Rae is now the current invoker. [0274] In accordance with external device 900 receiving the input to invoke second DA 904, second DA 904 generates, in the second language, a response to the natural language input. The response indicates that second DA 904 initiates a task corresponding to the natural language input. For example, second DA 904 generates the response “en Paris, son las 6pm” to indicate initiating the task of providing the current time in Paris. External device 900 transmits the response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session) and device 800 receives the response. [0275] The examples of FIGS.9A-9F show that to successfully issue a follow up request (e.g., without providing input to invoke a DA), each participant speaks the follow up request in the language of their own DA. In other examples, participants may issue a follow up request in a language in which any DA in the communication session is configured to operate. For example, after the external device(s) receive and output the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” in FIG.9A, a participant may speak a follow up request in a language of any DA in the communication session. In some examples, the follow up request is received by the participant’s device without the device receiving, after outputting the first response, input to invoke a DA. In some examples, the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for further user input. [0276] In some examples, the DAs of the communication session coordinate amongst each other to determine the correct DA to handle the follow up request, e.g., the DA configured to operate in the language of the follow up request. For example, in response to outputting the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” at the respective devices, each DA monitors for the follow up request. Upon receiving the follow up request (e.g., from the DA’s user or from another device), each DA determines whether the follow up request is intended for itself. For example, each DA performs STT processing on the follow up request (e.g., using STT processing module 730) to determine a speech recognition confidence score. Each DA then causes the respective device to transmit the speech recognition confidence score to each other device. Each DA compares its determined speech recognition confidence score to the speech recognition confidence scores received from other device(s). Accordingly, the DA having the highest speech recognition confidence score (e.g., the DA that determines its generated confidence score is higher than all received confidence scores) determines that the follow up request is intended for itself. [0277] In some examples, upon determining that the follow up request is intended for a particular DA, the DA causes the respective device to transmit, to the other device(s), instructions indicating that the follow up request is not intended for the other DA(s). The instructions instruct the other DA(s) to cease any ongoing processing of the follow up request and to not generate any output responsive to the follow up request. In some examples, upon determining that the follow up request is intended for a particular DA, the particular DA generates a response to the follow up request in its respective language. [0278] For example, continuing from FIG.9A, suppose Rae speaks the follow up request “what about in Paris?” after external device 900 outputs the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” According to the above discussed techniques, first DA 804 determines that the follow up request is intended for itself (as the follow up request is in English and first DA 804 is configured to operate in English). First DA 804 thus generates the response “it’s 6pm in Paris” and device 800 transmits the response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). In this manner, Rae may receive an intended response to a follow up request she speaks in English, despite that her second DA 904 is configured to operate in Spanish. [0279] FIGS.10A-10D below illustrate examples where, to successfully issue a follow up request, a participant issues the follow up request in the language in which the currently invoked DA is configured to operate. [0280] In FIG. 10A, while device 800 is engaged in a communication session with external device 900 (and optionally other external device(s)), device 800 receives input to invoke first DA 804. For example, Tim provides the spoken trigger input “Hey Siri.” In FIGS.10A, 10B, and 10D below, Tim is the current invoker, meaning external device 900 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) have not received, during the communication session, input to invoke their respective DAs. [0281] Device 800 further receives, from Tim, a first natural language input in the first language. For example, after Tim speaks “Hey Siri,” Tim speaks “what time is it?”. Device 800 transmits the first natural language input to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0282] In accordance with invoking first DA 804, first DA 804 generates, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language speech input. For example, first DA 804 generates the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” Device 800 outputs the first response. Device 800 further transmits the first response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0283] Turning to FIG.10B, in some examples, if a participant intends to continue interacting with a DA in the communication session, they issue a second natural language input (a follow up request) in the language of the current invoker’s DA. For example, after device 800 transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” and external device 900 outputs the first response, external device 900 receives the follow up request in the first language. In FIG. 9B, Rae asks, “what about in Paris?” in English. Device 800 (and any other device(s) in the communication session) receive the follow up request from external device 900. In some examples, device 800 further outputs the follow up request. [0284] In some examples, the follow up request is received without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after receiving the transmitted first response. For example, Rae speaks “what about in Paris?” without providing a spoken trigger input (e.g., “Hola Siri”) and without pressing a button of external device 900. In some examples, the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for user input (e.g., about a previously requested task). [0285] In response to device 800 outputting the first response (e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino”), first DA 804 determines whether any follow up requests received from Tim are intended for the currently invoked first DA 804. In response device 800 outputting the first response, second DA 904 (and any other DA(s) in the communication session) determine whether any follow up requests, received from the DA’s respective user, are intended for the currently invoked first DA 804. This is in contrast to the examples discussed with respect to FIGS.9A-9E where each DA determines whether a follow up request received from a respective user is intended for itself. Accordingly, currently invoked first DA 804 may be the only DA in the communication session enabled to respond to the follow up request. [0286] In some examples, determining that a follow up request is intended for first DA 804 includes determining that the follow up request is received within a predetermined duration after the respective device outputs the first response. For example, second DA 904 determines that Rae’s follow up request “what about in Paris?” is intended for first DA 804 because the follow up request is received within a predetermined duration after external device 900 outputs “it’s 9am in Cupertino.” [0287] In some examples, determining that a follow up request is intended for first DA 804 is based on a gaze direction of a user. For example, a device detects user gaze data (via device camera(s)) and analyzes the gaze data to determine whether a follow up request, received from the device’s user, is intended for first DA 804. In some examples, a device detects user gaze data within a predetermined duration after the first response is output, e.g., by device 800. In some examples, a device determines that a follow up request is intended for first DA 804 if user gaze is directed to a displayed gaze target (e.g., at DA indicator 812 for a predetermined period) within a predetermined duration before a start time of the follow up request, if user gaze is directed to the gaze target at the start time, and/or if user gaze is directed to the gaze target at an end time of the follow up request. For example, second DA 904 determines that Rae’s follow up request “what about in Paris?” is intended for first DA 804 based on detecting Rae’s gaze at DA indicator 812. [0288] In some examples, in response to a DA (other than first DA 804) determining that a follow up request received from a respective user is intended for first DA 804, the respective device transmits, to device 800, an indication that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804. For example, external device 900 transmits, to device 800, an indication that the follow up request “what about in Paris?” is intended for first DA 804. If first DA 804 determines that a follow up request received from its respective user (e.g., Tim) is intended for itself, first DA 804 generates a second response to the follow request. [0289] In FIG. 10B, in accordance with receiving the follow up request from external device 900, first DA 804 generates a second response to the follow up request in the first language. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response further in accordance with device 800 receiving an indication that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving further input to invoke first DA 804 after outputting the first response and/or without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after outputting the first response. For example, in accordance with device 800 receiving, from external device 900, an indication that the follow up request “what about in Paris?” is intended for first DA 804, first DA 804 generates the second response “it’s 6pm in Paris.” In some examples, device 800 transmits the second response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0290] In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response based on context information (e.g., conversational context information) associated with the first natural language input and the first response. For example, the first natural language input “what time is it?” and the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” are associated with context information indicating the time domain. Accordingly, first DA 804 generates the second response “it’s 6pm in Paris” by interpreting “what about in Paris?” to refer to the time in Paris. [0291] In some examples, first DA 804 determines whether a received follow up request corresponds to a personal request. A personal request generally describes a user request having a response dependent on the particular user who provided the request. For example, a personal request corresponds to a personal domain, e.g., a domain associated with an actionable intent requiring the retrieval/modification of personal data. Example personal data includes a user’s contacts data, email data, message data, calendar data, reminders data, photos, videos, health information, financial information, web search history, media data (e.g., songs and audiobooks), information related to a user’s home (e.g., the states of the user’s home appliances and home security systems, home security system access information), and any other sensitive and/or private information the user may not want to expose to other users or devices. Example personal requests include “call mom” (as users can have different mothers), “how many calories did I burn today?”, “how much did I spend this month?”, “show me the last picture I took,” “turn off the porch light,” “lock the front door,” and the like. In contrast, non-personal requests may have responses independent of the user who provided the non-personal request. Example non-personal requests include “how old is Taylor Swift?”, “what’s the weather in Palo Alto?”, and “what’s the score of the Patriots game?”. In some examples, first DA 804 determines whether a request corresponds to a personal request by determining whether the request corresponds to a personal domain. Further techniques for determining whether a request corresponds to a personal request are described in U.S. Patent Application No.17/376,991, entitled “PERSONAL REQUEST CLASSIFIER,” filed on July 15, 2021, the content of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0292] In some examples, in accordance with a determination that a follow up request received from an external device corresponds to a personal request, first DA 804 generates a second response, in the first language, to the follow up request. The second response indicates that first DA 804 is unable to satisfy a user request included in the follow up request. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving further input to invoke first DA 804 after outputting the first response and/or without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after outputting the first response. For example, suppose Rae instead provides the follow up request “read my messages” instead of “what about in Paris?” in FIG.10B. First DA 804 determines that the follow up request corresponds to a personal request and thus generates the second response “sorry, I can’t do that.” First DA 804 generates the second response because first DA 804, operating on device 800, is unable to access Rae’s personal data (e.g., messages) stored on external device 900. Device 800 further transmits the second response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0293] In this manner, first DA 804 provides the participants in the communication session with feedback that first DA 804 is unable to satisfy personal requests from external devices, e.g., as first DA 804 is unable to access, for user privacy reasons, personal data stored on the external devices. Accordingly, in some examples, generating the second response “it’s 6pm in Paris” in FIG. 10B is performed in accordance with first DA 804 determining that the follow up request “what about in Paris?” does not correspond to a personal request. [0294] FIG.10C shows an example where Rae provides input to invoke second DA 904 to successfully handle a personal request. In FIG.10C, Rae provides input to invoke second DA 904. For example, external device 900 receives the spoken trigger input “Hola Siri.” Rae further provides, in the second language, a natural language input corresponding to a personal request. For example, external device 900 receives, from Rae “lee mis mensajes” in Spanish (“read my messages”). External device 900 transmits the natural language input to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). [0295] In accordance with invoking second DA 904, second DA 904 generates a response to the natural language input in the second language. The response indicates that second DA 904 initiates a task corresponding to the natural language input. For example, second DA 904 generates the response “Anthony dijo ‘hola’” (“Anthony says hi”) indicating that second DA 904 initiates the task of reading Rae’s messages. External device 900 further transmits the response to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). In this manner, Rae can successfully issue a personal request in a communication session by providing input to invoke second DA 904. By invoking second DA 904, the DA invocation transfers from device 800 in FIG. 10A to external device 900 in FIG.10C, meaning that Rae is now the current DA invoker and that second DA 904 can access Rae’s personal data to successfully handle Rae’s personal requests (recall that first DA 804 can only handle Tim’s personal requests because first DA 804 can only access Tim’s personal data). [0296] FIG.10D shows an example where Rae attempts to provide a follow up request in the second language of second DA 904. In FIG.10D, continuing with the example of FIG. 10A, after device 800 transmits the first response “it’s 9am in Cupertino” to external device 900, and after external device 900 outputs the first response, external device 900 receives the follow up request in the second language. For example, Rae speaks “¿y en Paris?” in Spanish. External device 900 transmits the follow up request to device 800 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). The follow up request is received at external device 900 without external device 900 receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, input to invoke second DA 904. In some examples, the follow up request does not include a response to a DA generated prompt for further user input. [0297] In FIG. 10D, second DA 904 determines that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804. In accordance with receiving the follow up request (and optionally in accordance with a determination that the follow up request is intended for first DA 804), first DA 804 generates, in the first language, a second response to the follow up request. The second response indicates that first DA 804 is unable to interpret the follow up request. In some examples, first DA 804 generates the second response without device 800 receiving further input to invoke first DA 804 after outputting the first response and/or without external device 900 receiving input to invoke second DA 904 after outputting the first response. For example, first DA 804 is unable to interpret the Spanish follow up request “¿y en Paris?” and thus generates the second response “sorry, I don’t understand.” Device 800 further transmits the second response to external device 900 (and to any other device(s) in the communication session). In this manner, first DA 804 can indicate (e.g., via the English second response) the correct language for interacting with the first DA 804, thereby promoting accurate and efficient DA interaction. Should Rae desire to successfully interact with a DA in Spanish, Rae may provide input at external device 900 to invoke second DA 904, e.g., as discussed with respect to FIG. 10C. For example, if Rae speaks “Hola Siri, ¿y en Paris?” to external device 900, the DA invocation transfers to external device 900 from device 800 and Rae is now the current invoker. Second DA 904 can thus generate the response “en Paris, son las 6pm” to successfully handle Rae’s request. 5. Processes for Digital Assistant Interactions in a Communication Session [0298] FIGS.11A-11C illustrate process 1100 for DA interactions in a communication session, according to various examples. Process 1100 is performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a DA. In some examples, process 1100 is performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of process 1100 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of process 1100 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of process 1100 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that process 1100 is not so limited. In other examples, process 1100 is performed using only a client device (e.g., device 800) or only multiple client devices. In process 1100, some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with the process 1100. [0299] At block 1102, while an electronic device (e.g., device 800) is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices (e.g., external device 900), input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device (e.g., first DA 804) is received from a first user (e.g., Tim) of the electronic device. In some examples, the input to invoke the first digital assistant includes a spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the electronic device. [0300] At block 1104, a natural language input corresponding to a task (e.g., “send a message saying hello” in FIG. 8B) is received from the first user. [0301] At block 1106, in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task (e.g., “who would you like to send a message to?” in FIG. 8B) is generated by the first digital assistant. [0302] At block 1108, the prompt for further user input about the task is transmitted (e.g., by device 800) to the one or more external devices. [0303] At block 1110, after transmitting the prompt for further user input, a response to the prompt for further user input (e.g., “Qingwei” in FIG. 8C) is received from an external device (e.g., external device 900) of the one or more external devices. [0304] At block 1112, the task is initiated by the first digital assistant based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device. In some examples, as shown in block 1114, initiating the task includes displaying, on the electronic device, an affordance (e.g., affordance 814 in FIG. 8C) corresponding to the task, where the first digital assistant generates the affordance based on the information corresponding to the first user. [0305] At block 1116, an output indicative of the initiated task (e.g., “your message to Qingwei says ‘hello’, ready to send?” in FIG. 8C) is transmitted (e.g., using audio control module 806) to the one or more external devices. [0306] In some examples, at block 1118, the one or more external devices are caused to each display the affordance (e.g., using display control module 808). In some examples, causing the one or more external devices to each display the affordance is performed in accordance with a determination that the task does not correspond to a second predetermined type of task (e.g., a secure task). In some examples, displaying, on the electronic device, the affordance includes displaying the affordance without causing the one or more external devices to each display the affordance in accordance with a determination that the task corresponds to the second predetermined type of task. [0307] In some examples, at block 1120, a first user input corresponding to a selection of the displayed affordance is received. In some examples, at block 1122, in response to receiving the first user input, the affordance is displayed in a modified state (e.g., affordance 814 in FIG.8D). In some examples, at block 1124, the one or more external devices are caused to each display the affordance in the modified state. [0308] In some examples, at block 1126, an instruction to display the affordance in a second modified state is received from a third external device of the one or more external devices, where the affordance is displayed in the second modified state on the third external device in response to receiving, at the third external device, a second user input corresponding to a selection of the affordance. In some examples, at block 1128, in response to receiving the instruction, the affordance is displayed on the electronic device in the second modified state (e.g., using display control module 808). [0309] In some examples, at block 1130, it is determined (e.g., by first DA 804) whether the task corresponds to a predetermined type of task. In some examples, at block 1132, in accordance with a determination that the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task and in accordance with receiving, from the external device, the response, a third output indicating that the first digital assistant is unable to complete the task (e.g., “sorry I can’t do that. Tim do you confirm?” in FIG. 8H) is generated by the first digital assistant. In some examples, initiating the task is performed in accordance with a determination that the task does not correspond to the predetermined type of task. [0310] In some examples, at block 1134, a third response to the prompt for further user input is received from the first user (e.g., “Yes” from Tim in FIG.8H). In some examples, at block 1136, in accordance with a determination that the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task and in accordance with a determination that the third response is received from the first user, the task is initiated by the first digital assistant based on the third response and the information corresponding to the first user. In some examples, at block 1138, a fourth output indicative of the initiated task (e.g., “ok I paid Larry $100” in FIG.8H) is transmitted to the one or more external devices. [0311] In some examples, the natural language input is in a first language and the first digital assistant is configured to operate in the first language. In some examples, at block 1140, it is determined (e.g., by first DA 804) whether the first digital assistant can interpret, in the first language, the response, where initiating the task is performed in accordance with a determination that the first digital assistant can interpret, in the first language, the response. In some examples, at block 1142, in accordance with a determination that the first digital assistant cannot interpret, in the first language, the response, a fifth output indicative of an error is transmitted to the one or more external devices. In some examples, a third digital assistant (e.g., second DA 904) operating on the external device is configured to operate in a second language different from the first language. [0312] In some examples, after transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the output indicative of the initiated task, a second natural language input corresponding to a second task
Figure imgf000096_0001
is received from a second external device of the one or more external devices, where the second external device receives the second natural language input from a second user of the second external device. In some examples, after receiving the second natural language input, a second prompt for user input about the second task is received from the second external
Figure imgf000096_0002
device, where the second prompt is generated by a second digital assistant (e.g., second DA 904) operating on the second external device. In some examples, a second response
Figure imgf000096_0004
( to the second prompt for user input is received from the first
Figure imgf000096_0003
user. In some examples, the second response is transmitted to the one or more external devices. In some examples, a second output is received
Figure imgf000096_0005
from the second external device, where the second digital assistant initiates the second task based on the second response and information corresponding to the second user stored on the second external device and the second output is indicative of the initiated second task. In some examples, the second prompt is received in accordance with the second external device receiving, from the second user, second input to invoke the second digital assistant. [0313] The operations described above with reference to FIGS.11A-11C are optionally implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-6B, 7A-7C, and 8A. For example, the operations of process 1100 may be implemented by device 800 and/or 900. It would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes are implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-6B, and 7A-7C. [0314] FIGS.12A-12B illustrate process 1200 for DA interactions in a communication session, according to various examples. Process 1200 is performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a DA. In some examples, process 1200 is performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of process 1200 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of process 1200 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of process 1200 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that process 1200 is not so limited. In other examples, process 1200 is performed using only a client device (e.g., device 800) or only multiple client devices. In process 1200, some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with the process 1200. [0315] At block 1202, while an electronic device (e.g., device 800) is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices (e.g., external device 900), input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device (e.g., first DA 804) is received from a first user of the electronic device. The first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language. [0316] At block 1204, a first natural language input in the first language (e.g., “what time is it?” in FIG.9A) is received from the first user. [0317] At block 1206, in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, a first response (e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino” in FIG.9A), in the first language, to the first natural language input is generated by the first digital assistant. [0318] At block 1208, the first response is transmitted (e.g., using audio control module 806) to the one or more external devices. [0319] In some examples, at block 1210, context information associated with the first natural language input is transmitted to an external device. [0320] At block 1212, after transmitting the first response, a second natural language input in a second language (e.g., “¿y en Paris?” in FIG.9B) is received from an external device of the one or more external devices. The second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant (e.g., second DA 904) operating on the external device. The second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language. In some examples, the second natural language input does not include a response to a prompt for user input generated by the first digital assistant or the second digital assistant. In some examples, the input to invoke the first digital assistant includes a spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the electronic device and the second input to invoke the second digital assistant includes the spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the external device. [0321] At block 1214, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input (e.g., “en Paris, son las 6pm” in FIG.9B) is received from the external device, where the second response is generated by the second digital assistant. In some examples, the second digital assistant generates the second response based on the context information. In some examples, the external device determines that the second natural language input is intended for the second digital assistant based on a gaze direction of a third user of the external device. In some examples, the second digital assistant generates the second response in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input is intended for the second digital assistant. In some examples, the second digital assistant generates the second response based on information corresponding to a second user of the external device, where the information is stored on the external device. [0322] In some examples, at block 1216, after transmitting the first response, a third natural language input in the first language (e.g., “what about in Paris?” in FIG. 9E) is received from the external device. The third natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, third input to invoke the second digital assistant. In some examples, at block 1218, a third response, in the second language, to the third natural language input (e.g., “no entiendo” in FIG. 9E) is received from the external device. The third response is generated by the second digital assistant and indicates that the second digital assistant is unable to interpret the third natural language input. [0323] In some examples, at block 1220, after transmitting the first response, a fourth natural language input in the second language (e.g., “¿y en Paris?” in FIG. 9F) is received from the external device. In some examples, at block 1222, a fourth response, in the second language, to the fourth natural language input (e.g., “en Paris, son las 6pm” in FIG. 9F) is received from the external device. The fourth response is generated by the second digital assistant. The fourth response is received in accordance with the external device receiving fourth input to invoke the second digital assistant (e.g., “Hola Siri” in FIG. 9F). The fourth response indicates that the second digital assistant initiates a task corresponding to the fourth natural language input. [0324] In some examples, at block 1224, after transmitting the first response, a fifth natural language input in the first language (e.g., “what about in Paris?” in FIG. 9C) is received from the first user. The fifth natural language input is received without the electronic device receiving, after transmitting first response, fifth input to invoke the first digital assistant. In some examples, at block 1126, in accordance with receiving the fifth natural language input, a fifth response (e.g., “it’s 6pm in Paris” in FIG.9C), in the first language, to the fifth natural language input is generated by the first digital assistant. The fifth response indicates an initiated task corresponding to the fifth natural language input. In some examples, at block 1228, the fifth response is transmitted to the one or more external devices (e.g., using audio control module 806). [0325] In some examples, at block 1230, after transmitting the first response, a sixth natural language input in a third language different from the first language (e.g., “¿y en Paris?” in FIG. 9D) is received from the first user. The sixth natural language input is received without the electronic device receiving, after transmitting first response, sixth input to invoke the first digital assistant. In some examples, at block 1232, in accordance with receiving the sixth natural language input, a sixth response, in the first language, to the sixth natural language input (e.g., “sorry I don’t understand” in FIG.9D) is generated by the first digital assistant. The sixth response indicates that the first digital assistant is unable to interpret the sixth natural language input. In some examples, at block 1234, the sixth response is transmitted to the one or more external devices (e.g., using audio control module 806). [0326] The operations described above with reference to FIGS.12A-12B are optionally implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-6B, 7A-7C, and 8A. For example, the operations of process 1200 may be implemented by device 800 and/or 900. It would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes are implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-6B, and 7A-7C. [0327] FIGS.13A-13B illustrate process 1300 for DA interactions in a communication session, according to various examples. Process 1300 is performed, for example, using one or more electronic devices implementing a DA. In some examples, process 1300 is performed using a client-server system (e.g., system 100), and the blocks of process 1300 are divided up in any manner between the server (e.g., DA server 106) and a client device. In other examples, the blocks of process 1300 are divided up between the server and multiple client devices (e.g., a mobile phone and a smart watch). Thus, while portions of process 1300 are described herein as being performed by particular devices of a client-server system, it will be appreciated that process 1300 is not so limited. In other examples, process 1300 is performed using only a client device (e.g., device 800) or only multiple client devices. In process 1300, some blocks are, optionally, combined, the order of some blocks is, optionally, changed, and some blocks are, optionally, omitted. In some examples, additional steps may be performed in combination with the process 1300. [0328] At block 1302, while an electronic device (e.g., device 800) is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices (e.g., external device 900), input to invoke a first digital assistant (e.g., first DA 804) operating on the electronic device is received from a first user of the electronic device. The first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language. [0329] At block 1304, a first natural language input in the first language (e.g., “what time is it?” in FIG.10A) is received from the first user. [0330] At block 1306, in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input (e.g., “it’s 9am in Cupertino”) is generated by the first digital assistant. [0331] At block 1308, the first response is transmitted (e.g., using audio control module 806) to the one or more external devices. [0332] At block 1310, after transmitting the first response, a second natural language input in the first language (e.g., “what about in Paris?” in FIG.10B) is received from an external device (e.g., external device 900) of the one or more external devices. The second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device (e.g., second DA 904). The second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language. In some examples, the second natural language input does not include a response to a prompt for user input generated by the first digital assistant or the second digital assistant In some examples the input to invoke the first digital assistant includes a spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the electronic device and the second input to invoke the second digital assistant includes the spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the external device. [0333] At block 1312, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input (e.g., “it’s 6pm in Paris” in FIG. 10B) is generated by the first digital assistant. In some examples, the first digital assistant generates the second response based on context information associated with the first natural language input and the first response. In some examples, the external device determines that the second natural language input is intended for the first digital assistant based on a gaze direction of a second user of the external device. In some examples, the first digital assistant generates the second response in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input is intended for the first digital assistant. [0334] At block 1314, the second response is transmitted (e.g., using audio control module 806) to the one or more external devices. [0335] In some examples, at block 1316, a third natural language input in the second language (e.g., “¿y en Paris?” in FIG. 10D) is received from the external device. The third natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, third input to invoke the second digital assistant. In some examples, at block 1318, in accordance with receiving the third natural language input, a third response, in the first language, to the third natural language input (e.g., “sorry, I don’t understand” in FIG. 10D) is generated by the first digital assistant. The third response indicates that the first digital assistant is unable to interpret the third natural language input. In some examples, at block 1320, the third response is transmitted to the one or more external devices (e.g., using audio control module 806). [0336] In some examples, at block 1322, a fourth natural language input in the second language is received from the external device. In some examples, at block 1324, a fourth response, in the second language, to the fourth natural language input is received from the external device. The fourth response is generated by the second digital assistant. The fourth response is received in accordance with the external device receiving fourth input to invoke the second digital assistant. The fourth response indicates the second digital assistant initiates a task corresponding to the fourth natural language input. [0337] In some examples, at block 1326, it is determined (e.g., by first DA 804) whether the second natural language input corresponds to a personal request. In some examples, generating the second response is performed in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input does not correspond to a personal request. In some examples, at block 1328, in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input corresponds to a personal request, a fifth response, in the first language, to the second natural language input is generated by the first digital assistant. The fifth response indicates that the first digital assistant is unable to satisfy a user request included in the second natural language input. In some examples, at block 1330, the fifth response is transmitted to the one or more external devices (e.g., using audio control module 806). [0338] In some examples, at block 1332, a sixth natural language input in the second language (e.g., “less mis mensajes” in FIG. 10C) is received from the external device. The sixth natural language input corresponds to a personal request. In some examples, at block 1334, a sixth response, in the second language, to the sixth natural language input (e.g., “Anthony dijo ‘hola’” in FIG. 10C) is received from the external device. The sixth response is generated by the second digital assistant. The sixth response is received in accordance with the external device receiving sixth input to invoke the second digital assistant. The sixth response indicates that the second digital assistant initiates a task corresponding to the sixth natural language input. [0339] The operations described above with reference to FIGS.13A-13B are optionally implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-6B, 7A-7C, and 8A. For example, the operations of process 1300 may be implemented by device 800 and/or 900. It would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes are implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1-4, 6A-6B, and 7A-7C. [0340] In accordance with some implementations, a computer-readable storage medium (e.g., a non-transitory computer readable storage medium) is provided, the computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods or processes described herein. [0341] In accordance with some implementations, an electronic device (e.g., a portable electronic device) is provided that comprises means for performing any of the methods or processes described herein. [0342] In accordance with some implementations, an electronic device (e.g., a portable electronic device) is provided that comprises a processing unit configured to perform any of the methods or processes described herein. [0343] In accordance with some implementations, an electronic device (e.g., a portable electronic device) is provided that comprises one or more processors and memory storing one or more programs for execution by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods or processes described herein. [0344] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the techniques and their practical applications. Others skilled in the art are thereby enabled to best utilize the techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated. [0345] Although the disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in the art. Such changes and modifications are to be understood as being included within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims. [0346] As described above, one aspect of the present technology is the gathering and use of data available from various sources to generate DA responses in a communication session. The present disclosure contemplates that in some instances, this gathered data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person. Such personal information data can include demographic data, location- based data, telephone numbers, email addresses, twitter IDs, home addresses, data or records relating to a user’s health or level of fitness (e.g., vital signs measurements, medication information, exercise information), date of birth, or any other identifying or personal information. [0347] The present disclosure recognizes that the use of such personal information data, in the present technology, can be used to the benefit of users. For example, the personal information data can be used to satisfy user requests to DAs Further other uses for personal information data that benefit the user are also contemplated by the present disclosure. For instance, health and fitness data may be used to provide insights into a user’s general wellness, or may be used as positive feedback to individuals using technology to pursue wellness goals. [0348] The present disclosure contemplates that the entities responsible for the collection, analysis, disclosure, transfer, storage, or other use of such personal information data will comply with well-established privacy policies and/or privacy practices. In particular, such entities should implement and consistently use privacy policies and practices that are generally recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining personal information data private and secure. Such policies should be easily accessible by users, and should be updated as the collection and/or use of data changes. Personal information from users should be collected for legitimate and reasonable uses of the entity and not shared or sold outside of those legitimate uses. Further, such collection/sharing should occur after receiving the informed consent of the users. Additionally, such entities should consider taking any needed steps for safeguarding and securing access to such personal information data and ensuring that others with access to the personal information data adhere to their privacy policies and procedures. Further, such entities can subject themselves to evaluation by third parties to certify their adherence to widely accepted privacy policies and practices. In addition, policies and practices should be adapted for the particular types of personal information data being collected and/or accessed and adapted to applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For instance, in the US, collection of or access to certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state laws, such as the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); whereas health data in other countries may be subject to other regulations and policies and should be handled accordingly. Hence different privacy practices should be maintained for different personal data types in each country. [0349] Despite the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates embodiments in which users selectively block the use of, or access to, personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware and/or software elements can be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, in the case of providing DA responses in communication sessions, the present technology can be configured to allow users to select to “opt in” or “opt out” of participation in the collection of personal information data during registration for services or anytime thereafter. In another example, users can select not to allow DAs to access personal information data (e.g., during a communication session). In yet another example, users can select to limit the length of time DAs can access personal information data. In addition to providing “opt in” and “opt out” options, the present disclosure contemplates providing notifications relating to the access or use of personal information. For instance, a user may be notified upon downloading an app that their personal information data will be accessed and then reminded again just before personal information data is accessed by the app. [0350] Moreover, it is the intent of the present disclosure that personal information data should be managed and handled in a way to minimize risks of unintentional or unauthorized access or use. Risk can be minimized by limiting the collection of data and deleting data once it is no longer needed. In addition, and when applicable, including in certain health related applications, data de-identification can be used to protect a user’s privacy. De- identification may be facilitated, when appropriate, by removing specific identifiers (e.g., date of birth, etc.), controlling the amount or specificity of data stored (e.g., collecting location data at a city level rather than at an address level), controlling how data is stored (e.g., aggregating data across users), and/or other methods. [0351] Therefore, although the present disclosure broadly covers use of personal information data to implement one or more various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that the various embodiments can also be implemented without the need for accessing such personal information data. That is, the various embodiments of the present technology are not rendered inoperable due to the lack of all or a portion of such personal information data. For example, DAs can satisfy user requests based on non-personal information data or a bare minimum amount of personal information, such as the content being requested by the device associated with a user, other non-personal information available to the DA, or publicly available information.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS: 1. A method, comprising: at an electronic device with one or more processors and memory: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receiving, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task.
2. The method of claim 1, further comprising: at the electronic device: after transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the output indicative of the initiated task: receiving, from a second external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input corresponding to a second task, wherein the second external device receives the second natural language input from a second user of the second external device; after receiving the second natural language input, receiving, from the second external device, a second prompt for user input about the second task, wherein the second prompt is generated by a second digital assistant operating on the second external device; receiving, from the first user, a second response to the second prompt for user input; transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the second response; and receiving, from the second external device, a second output, wherein: the second digital assistant initiates the second task based on the second response and information corresponding to the second user stored on the second external device; and the second output is indicative of the initiated second task.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein the second prompt is received in accordance with the second external device receiving, from the second user, second input to invoke the second digital assistant.
4. The method of any of claims 1-3, further comprising: determining whether the task corresponds to a predetermined type of task; in accordance with a determination that the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task: in accordance with receiving, from the external device, the response, generating, by the first digital assistant, a third output indicating that the first digital assistant is unable to complete the task, wherein initiating the task is performed in accordance with a determination that the task does not correspond to the predetermined type of task.
5. The method of claim 4, further comprising: receiving, from the first user, a third response to the prompt for further user input; and in accordance with a determination that the task corresponds to the predetermined type of task and in accordance with a determination that the third response is received from the first user, initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the third response and the information corresponding to the first user, the task; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, a fourth output indicative of the initiated task.
6. The method of any of claims 1-5, wherein the natural language input is in a first language and the first digital assistant is configured to operate in the first language, the method further comprising: determining whether the first digital assistant can interpret, in the first language, the response, wherein initiating the task is performed in accordance with a determination that the first digital assistant can interpret, in the first language, the response; and in accordance with a determination that the first digital assistant cannot interpret, in the first language, the response, transmitting, to the one or more external devices, a fifth output indicative of an error.
7. The method of claim 6, wherein a third digital assistant operating on the external device is configured to operate in a second language different from the first language.
8. The method of any of claims 1-7, wherein initiating the task includes displaying, on the electronic device, an affordance corresponding to the task, wherein the first digital assistant generates the affordance based on the information corresponding to the first user, the method further comprising: causing the one or more external devices to each display the affordance.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein: causing the one or more external devices to each display the affordance is performed in accordance with a determination that the task does not correspond to a second predetermined type of task; and displaying, on the electronic device, the affordance includes: displaying the affordance without causing the one or more external devices to each display the affordance in accordance with a determination that the task corresponds to the second predetermined type of task.
10. The method of any of claims 8-9, further comprising: receiving a first user input corresponding to a selection of the displayed affordance; and in response to receiving the first user input, displaying the affordance in a modified state; and causing the one or more external devices to each display the affordance in the modified state.
11. The method of any of claims 8-10, further comprising: receiving, from a third external device of the one or more external devices, an instruction to display the affordance in a second modified state, wherein the affordance is displayed in the second modified state on the third external device in response to receiving, at the third external device, a second user input corresponding to a selection of the affordance; and in response to receiving the instruction, displaying, on the electronic device, the affordance in the second modified state.
12. The method of any of claims 1-11, wherein the input to invoke the first digital assistant includes a spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the electronic device.
13. An electronic device, comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receiving, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task.
14. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device, cause the first electronic device to: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receive, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receive, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generate, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmit, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receive, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiate, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmit, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task.
15. An electronic device, comprising: means for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device; receiving, from the first user, a natural language input corresponding to a task; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a prompt for further user input about the task; transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the prompt for further user input about the task; after transmitting the prompt for further user input, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a response to the prompt for further user input; initiating, by the first digital assistant, based on the response and information corresponding to the first user stored on the electronic device, the task; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, an output indicative of the initiated task.
16. An electronic device, comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the methods of any one of claims 1-12.
17. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform the methods of any one of claims 1-12.
18. An electronic device, comprising: means for performing the methods of any one of claims 1-12.
19. A method, comprising: at an electronic device with one or more processors and memory: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, wherein the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, wherein: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receiving, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input, wherein the second response is generated by the second digital assistant.
20. The method of claim 19, further comprising: transmitting, to the external device, context information associated with the first natural language input, wherein the second digital assistant generates the second response based on the context information.
21. The method of any of claims 19-20, further comprising: after transmitting the first response, receiving, from the external device, a third natural language input in the first language, wherein the third natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, third input to invoke the second digital assistant; and receiving, from the external device, a third response, in the second language, to the third natural language input, wherein the third response is generated by the second digital assistant and indicates that the second digital assistant is unable to interpret the third natural language input.
22. The method of any of claims 19-21, further comprising: after transmitting the first response, receiving, from the external device, a fourth natural language input in the second language; receiving, from the external device, a fourth response, in the second language, to the fourth natural language input, wherein: the fourth response is generated by the second digital assistant; the fourth response is received in accordance with the external device receiving fourth input to invoke the second digital assistant; and the fourth response indicates that the second digital assistant initiates a task corresponding to the fourth natural language input.
23. The method of any of claims 19-22, wherein the second digital assistant generates the second response based on information corresponding to a second user of the external device, wherein the information is stored on the external device.
24. The method of any of claims 19-23, further comprising: after transmitting the first response, receiving, from the first user, a fifth natural language input in the first language, wherein the fifth natural language input is received without the electronic device receiving, after transmitting first response, fifth input to invoke the first digital assistant; in accordance with receiving the fifth natural language input, generating, by the first digital assistant, a fifth response, in the first language, to the fifth natural language input, wherein the fifth response indicates an initiated task corresponding to the fifth natural language input; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the fifth response.
25. The method of any of claims 19-24, further comprising: after transmitting the first response, receiving, from the first user, a sixth natural language input in a third language different from the first language, wherein the sixth natural language input is received without the electronic device receiving, after transmitting first response, sixth input to invoke the first digital assistant; in accordance with receiving the sixth natural language input, generating, by the first digital assistant, a sixth response, in the first language, to the sixth natural language input, wherein the sixth response indicates that the first digital assistant is unable to interpret the sixth natural language input; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the sixth response.
26. The method of any of claims 19-25, wherein: the external device determines that the second natural language input is intended for the second digital assistant based on a gaze direction of a third user of the external device; and the second digital assistant generates the second response in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input is intended for the second digital assistant.
27. The method of any of claims 19-26, wherein the second natural language input does not include a response to a prompt for user input generated by the first digital assistant or the second digital assistant.
28. The method of any of claims 19-27, wherein: the input to invoke the first digital assistant includes a spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the electronic device; and the second input to invoke the second digital assistant includes the spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the external device.
29. An electronic device, comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, wherein the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, wherein: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receiving, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input, wherein the second response is generated by the second digital assistant.
30. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device, cause the first electronic device to: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receive, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, wherein the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receive, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generate, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmit the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receive, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, wherein: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receive, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input, wherein the second response is generated by the second digital assistant.
31. An electronic device, comprising: means for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, wherein the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, a first response, in the first language, to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in a second language, wherein: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in the second language; and receiving, from the external device, a second response, in the second language, to the second natural language input, wherein the second response is generated by the second digital assistant.
32. An electronic device, comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the methods of any one of claims 19-28.
33. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform the methods of any one of claims 19-28.
34. An electronic device, comprising: means for performing the methods of any one of claims 19-28.
35. A method, comprising: at an electronic device with one or more processors and memory: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, wherein the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, wherein: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generating, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input; and transmitting the second response to the one or more external devices.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein the first digital assistant generates the second response based on context information associated with the first natural language input and the first response.
37. The method of any of claims 35-36, further comprising: receiving, from the external device, a third natural language input in the second language, wherein the third natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, third input to invoke the second digital assistant; in accordance with receiving the third natural language input, generating, by the first digital assistant, a third response, in the first language, to the third natural language input, wherein the third response indicates that the first digital assistant is unable to interpret the third natural language input; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the third response.
38. The method of any of claims 35-37, further comprising: receiving, from the external device, a fourth natural language input in the second language; and receiving, from the external device, a fourth response, in the second language, to the fourth natural language input, wherein: the fourth response is generated by the second digital assistant; the fourth response is received in accordance with the external device receiving fourth input to invoke the second digital assistant; and the fourth response indicates the second digital assistant initiates a task corresponding to the fourth natural language input.
39. The method of any of claims 35-38, further comprising: determining whether the second natural language input corresponds to a personal request, wherein generating the second response is performed in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input does not correspond to a personal request.
40. The method of claim 39, further comprising: in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input corresponds to a personal request, generating, by the first digital assistant, a fifth response, in the first language, to the second natural language input, wherein the fifth response indicates that the first digital assistant is unable to satisfy a user request included in the second natural language input; and transmitting, to the one or more external devices, the fifth response.
41. The method of any of claims 35-40, further comprising: receiving, from the external device, a sixth natural language input in the second language, the sixth natural language input corresponding to a personal request; receiving, from the external device, a sixth response, in the second language, to the sixth natural language input, wherein: the sixth response is generated by the second digital assistant; the sixth response is received in accordance with the external device receiving sixth input to invoke the second digital assistant; and the sixth response indicates that the second digital assistant initiates a task corresponding to the sixth natural language input.
42. The method of any of claims 35-41, wherein: the external device determines that the second natural language input is intended for the first digital assistant based on a gaze direction of a second user of the external device; and the first digital assistant generates the second response in accordance with a determination that the second natural language input is intended for the first digital assistant.
43. The method of any of claims 35-42, wherein the second natural language input does not include a response to a prompt for user input generated by the first digital assistant or the second digital assistant.
44. The method of any of claims 35-43, wherein: the input to invoke the first digital assistant includes a spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the electronic device; and the second input to invoke the second digital assistant includes the spoken trigger input or a selection of a button of the external device.
45. An electronic device, comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, wherein the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, wherein: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generating, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input; and transmitting the second response to the one or more external devices.
46. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of a first electronic device, cause the first electronic device to: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receive, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, wherein the first digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receive, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generate, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmit the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receive, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, wherein: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generate, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input; and transmit the second response to the one or more external devices.
47. An electronic device, comprising: means for: while the electronic device is engaged in a communication session with one or more external devices: receiving, from a first user of the electronic device, input to invoke a first digital assistant operating on the electronic device, wherein first the digital assistant is configured to operate in a first language; receiving, from the first user, a first natural language input in the first language; in accordance with invoking the first digital assistant, generating, by the first digital assistant, in the first language, a first response to the first natural language input; transmitting the first response to the one or more external devices; after transmitting the first response, receiving, from an external device of the one or more external devices, a second natural language input in the first language, wherein: the second natural language input is received without the external device receiving, after receiving the transmitted first response, second input to invoke a second digital assistant operating on the external device; and the second digital assistant is configured to operate in a second language; generating, by the first digital assistant, a second response, in the first language, to the second natural language input; and transmitting the second response to the one or more external devices.
48. An electronic device, comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the methods of any one of claims 35-44.
49. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform the methods of any one of claims 35-44.
50. An electronic device, comprising: means for performing the methods of any one of claims 35-44.
PCT/IB2022/000474 2021-08-13 2022-08-10 Digital assistant interaction in a communication session WO2023017320A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020247005007A KR20240027140A (en) 2021-08-13 2022-08-10 Digital assistant interaction in communication sessions
CN202280056406.4A CN117813583A (en) 2021-08-13 2022-08-10 Digital assistant interactions in a communication session

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202163233001P 2021-08-13 2021-08-13
US63/233,001 2021-08-13
US17/866,984 US20230058929A1 (en) 2021-08-13 2022-07-18 Digital assistant interaction in a communication session
US17/866,984 2022-07-18

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023017320A1 true WO2023017320A1 (en) 2023-02-16

Family

ID=83690569

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2022/000474 WO2023017320A1 (en) 2021-08-13 2022-08-10 Digital assistant interaction in a communication session

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (1) US20230058929A1 (en)
KR (1) KR20240027140A (en)
WO (1) WO2023017320A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DK179496B1 (en) 2017-05-12 2019-01-15 Apple Inc. USER-SPECIFIC Acoustic Models
US11769497B2 (en) 2020-02-12 2023-09-26 Apple Inc. Digital assistant interaction in a video communication session environment

Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6323846B1 (en) 1998-01-26 2001-11-27 University Of Delaware Method and apparatus for integrating manual input
US6570557B1 (en) 2001-02-10 2003-05-27 Finger Works, Inc. Multi-touch system and method for emulating modifier keys via fingertip chords
US20050190059A1 (en) 2004-03-01 2005-09-01 Apple Computer, Inc. Acceleration-based theft detection system for portable electronic devices
US20060017692A1 (en) 2000-10-02 2006-01-26 Wehrenberg Paul J Methods and apparatuses for operating a portable device based on an accelerometer
US7657849B2 (en) 2005-12-23 2010-02-02 Apple Inc. Unlocking a device by performing gestures on an unlock image
US10840862B2 (en) 2018-09-19 2020-11-17 Nxp Usa, Inc. Chopper stabilized amplifier with parallel notch filters
US10903964B2 (en) 2017-03-24 2021-01-26 Apple Inc. Techniques to enable physical downlink control channel communications
US11038590B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-06-15 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Optical transmission device and optical transmission system
US11048264B2 (en) 2018-11-16 2021-06-29 Beijing Didi Infinity Technology And Development Co., Ltd. Systems and methods for positioning vehicles under poor lighting conditions
US20210249009A1 (en) * 2020-02-12 2021-08-12 Apple Inc. Digital assistant interaction in a video communication session environment

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6323846B1 (en) 1998-01-26 2001-11-27 University Of Delaware Method and apparatus for integrating manual input
US20020015024A1 (en) 1998-01-26 2002-02-07 University Of Delaware Method and apparatus for integrating manual input
US20060017692A1 (en) 2000-10-02 2006-01-26 Wehrenberg Paul J Methods and apparatuses for operating a portable device based on an accelerometer
US6570557B1 (en) 2001-02-10 2003-05-27 Finger Works, Inc. Multi-touch system and method for emulating modifier keys via fingertip chords
US20050190059A1 (en) 2004-03-01 2005-09-01 Apple Computer, Inc. Acceleration-based theft detection system for portable electronic devices
US7657849B2 (en) 2005-12-23 2010-02-02 Apple Inc. Unlocking a device by performing gestures on an unlock image
US10903964B2 (en) 2017-03-24 2021-01-26 Apple Inc. Techniques to enable physical downlink control channel communications
US11038590B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-06-15 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Optical transmission device and optical transmission system
US10840862B2 (en) 2018-09-19 2020-11-17 Nxp Usa, Inc. Chopper stabilized amplifier with parallel notch filters
US11048264B2 (en) 2018-11-16 2021-06-29 Beijing Didi Infinity Technology And Development Co., Ltd. Systems and methods for positioning vehicles under poor lighting conditions
US20210249009A1 (en) * 2020-02-12 2021-08-12 Apple Inc. Digital assistant interaction in a video communication session environment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20230058929A1 (en) 2023-02-23
KR20240027140A (en) 2024-02-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11887585B2 (en) Global re-ranker
US20230036798A1 (en) Systems and methods for providing search interface with contextual suggestions
US10733982B2 (en) Multi-directional dialog
US11231903B2 (en) Multi-modal interfaces
US11838734B2 (en) Multi-device audio adjustment coordination
US11783827B2 (en) Determining suggested subsequent user actions during digital assistant interaction
EP3699907B1 (en) Maintaining privacy of personal information
EP4086750A1 (en) Digital assistant handling of personal requests
US20220374727A1 (en) Intelligent device selection using historical interactions
WO2019231537A1 (en) Virtual assistant operation in multi-device environments
US20230058929A1 (en) Digital assistant interaction in a communication session
US20230098174A1 (en) Digital assistant for providing handsfree notification management
US20220382994A1 (en) Reform input in flow execution
EP3602540B1 (en) Client server processing of a natural language input for maintaining privacy of personal information
EP3596625A1 (en) Offline personal assistant
US11908473B2 (en) Task modification after task initiation
EP4287022A1 (en) Task execution based on context
US20230359334A1 (en) Discovering digital assistant tasks
US20230352014A1 (en) Digital assistant response modes
US20230393872A1 (en) Digital assistant integration with system interface
US20230367795A1 (en) Navigating and performing device tasks using search interface
US20230376690A1 (en) Variable length phrase predictions
US20230368787A1 (en) Voice-activated shortcut registration
WO2023219911A1 (en) Registration of voice-activated shortcuts
WO2023219844A1 (en) Navigating and performing device tasks using search interface

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22789289

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20247005007

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020247005007

Country of ref document: KR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022789289

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20240313